Division 23

Design & Construction Standards:
TECHNICAL GUIDELINES
Division 23
23 01 30.51 HVAC Air Duct Cleaning 23 37 13 Diffusers, Registers, and Grilles
23 05 00 Common Work Results for HVAC 23 38 13 Commercial-Kitchen Hoods
23 05 23 General Duty Valves for HVAC 23 40 00 HVAC Air Cleaning Devices
23 05 48 Mechanical Sound and Vibration 23 51 00 Breechings Chimneys and Stacks
23 05 53 Identification for HVAC 23 52 00 Condensing Boilers
23 05 93 Testing Adjusting and Balancing 23 52 23 Cast Iron Boiler
23 07 00 HVAC Insulation 23 57 00 Heat Exchangers for HVAC
23 08 00 Commissioning for HVAC 23 62 00 Packaged Compressor and Condenser Unit
23 11 23 Natural Gas Piping 23 63 13 Air-Cooled Refrigerant Condensers
23 21 13 Hydronic Piping 23 64 16 Centrifugal Water Chillers
23 21 13.33 Geothermal Energy 23 65 00 Cooling Towers
23 21 23 Hydronic Pumps 23 72 00 Air-To-Air Energy Recovery Equipment
23 22 13 Steam and Condensate Piping Pumps 23 73 00 Indoor Central-Station Air-Handling Units
23 22 23 Steam Condensate Pumps 23 74 13 Packaged Outdoor Rooftop Units
23 23 00 Refrigerant Piping 23 81 23 Computer Room Air Conditioning
23 25 00 HVAC Water Treatment 23 82 16 Air Coils
23 31 00 HVAC Duct and Casings 23 82 33 Convectors
23 34 23 HVAC Power Ventilation 23 82 39 Unit Heaters
23 35 00 Special Exhaust Systems 23 83 23 Unit Ventilators
23 36 00 Air Terminal Unit
FACILITY MANAGEMENT
April 2016
SECTION 23 01 30.51
HVAC AIR DUCT CLEANING
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 HEALTH AND SAFETY
A. Safety Standards: cleaning contractors shall comply with all applicable federal, state and local requirements for
protecting the safety of the contractors’ employees, building occupants, and the environment. In particular, all
applicable standards of the Occupational Safety and Health Administration (OSHA) shall be followed when
working in accordance with this specification.
B. Occupant Safety: no processes or materials shall be employed in such a manner that they will introduce
additional hazards into occupied spaces.
C. Disposal of Debris: all Debris removed from the HVAC System shall be disposed of in accordance with
applicable federal, state and local requirements.
1.02 QUALIFICATION OF THE HVAC SYSTEM CLEANING CONTRACTOR
A. Membership: the HVAC system cleaning contractor shall be a certified member of the National Air Duct
Cleaners Association (NADCA), or shall maintain membership in a nationally recognized non-profit industry
organization dedicated to the cleaning of HVAC systems.
B. Certification: the HVAC system cleaning contractor shall have a minimum of one (1) Air System Cleaning
Specialist (ASCS) certified by NADCA on a full time basis, or shall have staff certified by a nationally
recognized certification program and organization dedicated to the cleaning of HVAC systems.
C. Supervisor Qualifications: a person certified as an ASCS by NADCA, or maintaining an equivalent
certification by a nationally recognized program and organization, shall be responsible for the total work herein
specified.
D. Experience: the HVAC system cleaning contractor shall submit records of experience in the field of HVAC
system cleaning as requested by the Owner. Bids shall only be considered from firms which are regularly
engaged in HVAC system maintenance with an emphasis on HVAC system cleaning and decontamination.
E. Equipment, Materials and Labor: the HVAC system cleaning contractor shall possess and furnish all necessary
equipment, materials and labor to adequately perform the specified services.
1. The contractor shall assure that its employees have received safety equipment training, medical
surveillance programs, individual health protection measures, and manufacturer’s product and material
safety data sheets (MSDS) as required for the work by the U. S. Occupational Safety and Health
Administration, and as described by this specification.
2. The contractor shall maintain a copy of all current MSDS documentation and safety certifications at the site
at all times, as well as comply with all other site documentation requirements of applicable OSHA
programs and this specification.
3. Contractor shall submit to the Owner all Material Safety Data Sheets (MSDS) for all chemical products
proposed to be used in the cleaning process.
1.03 ACCEPTABLE SUPPLIERS
A. Ductworks
B. Monster Vac
PART 2 HVAC SYSTEM CLEANING SPECIFICATIONS AND REQUIREMENTS
2.01 SCOPE OF WORK:
A. Scope: this section defines the minimum requirements necessary to render HVAC components clean.
Denver Public Schools – Facility Management 23 01 30.51 HVAC Air Duct Cleaning
Technical Construction Guidelines Page 1 of 5 Update: April 2016
B. The Contractor: shall be responsible for the removal of visible surface contaminants and deposits from within
the HVAC system in strict accordance with these specifications.
C. The HVAC system: includes any interior surface of the facility’s air distribution system for conditioned spaces
and/or occupied zones. This includes the entire heating, air-conditioning and ventilation system from the points
where the air enters the system to the points where the air is discharged from the system. The return air grilles,
return air ducts (except ceiling plenums and mechanical room) to the air handling unit (AHU), the interior
surfaces of the AHU, mixing box, coil compartment, condensate drain pans, humidifiers and dehumidifiers,
supply air ducts, fans, fan housing, fan blades, air wash systems, spray eliminators, turning vanes, filters, filter
housings, reheat coils, and supply diffusers are all considered part of the HVAC system.
2.02 IN SUMMARY THE CONTRACTOR SHALL CLEAN
A. The full length of all supply air ducts
B. The full length of all return air ducts
C. The full length of all outside air ducts
D. All supply and return air registers and diffusers
E. All vertical shafts
F. All air handlers including coils, blowers, filter racks, drain pans, and the entire interior of the air handler
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 GENERAL HVAC SYSTEM CLEANING REQUIREMENTS
A. Containment: debris removed during cleaning shall be collected and precautions must be taken to ensure that
Debris is not otherwise dispersed outside the HVAC system during the cleaning process.
B. Particulate Collection: where the Particulate Collection Equipment is exhausting inside the building, HEPA
filtration with 99.97% collection efficiency for 0.3-micron size (or greater) particles shall be used. When the
Particulate Collection Equipment is exhausting outside the building, Mechanical Cleaning operations shall be
undertaken only with Particulate Collection Equipment in place, including adequate filtration to contain Debris
removed from the HVAC system. When the Particulate Collection Equipment is exhausting outside the
building, precautions shall be taken to locate the equipment down wind and away from all air intakes and other
points of entry into the building.
C. Controlling Odors: all reasonable measures shall be taken to control offensive odors and/or mist vapors during
the cleaning process.
D. Component Cleaning: cleaning methods shall be employed such that all HVAC system components must be
Visibly Clean. Upon completion, all components must be returned to those settings recorded just prior to
cleaning operations.
E. Air-Volume Control Devices: dampers and any air-directional mechanical devices inside the HVAC system
must have their position marked prior to cleaning and, upon completion, must be restored to their marked
position.
F. Service Openings: the contractor shall utilize service openings, as required for proper cleaning, at various
points of the HVAC system for physical and mechanical entry, and inspection.
1. Contractor shall utilize the existing service openings already installed in the HVAC system where possible.
2. Other openings shall be created where needed and they must be created so they can be sealed in accordance
with industry codes and standards.
3. Closures must not significantly hinder, restrict, or alter the air-flow within the system.
4. Closures must be properly insulated to prevent heat loss/gain or condensation on surfaces within the
system.
5. Openings must not compromise the structural integrity of the system.
6. Construction techniques used in the creation of openings should conform to requirements of applicable
building and fire codes, and applicable NFPA, AMACNA and NADCA Standards.
7. Cutting service openings into flexible duct is not permitted. Flexible duct shall be disconnected at the ends
as needed for proper cleaning and inspection.
8. Rigid fiber glass duct board duct systems shall be resealed in accordance with NAIMA recommended
practices. Only closure techniques which comply with UL Standard 181 or UL Standard 181a are suitable
for fiber glass duct system closures.
9. All service openings capable of being re-opened for future inspection or remediation shall be clearly
marked and shall have their location reported to the Owner in project report documents.
G. Ceiling sections (tile): The contractor may remove and reinstall ceiling sections to gain access to HVAC
systems during the cleaning process.
H. Air distribution devices (registers, grilles & diffusers): The contractor shall clean all air distribution devices.
I. Air handling units, terminal units (VAV, Dual duct boxes, etc.), blowers and fans: The contractor shall insure
that supply and return fans and blowers are thoroughly cleaned. Areas to be cleaned include blowers, fan
housings, plenums (except ceiling supply and return plenums), scrolls, blades, or vanes, shafts, baffles, dampers
and drive assemblies. All visible surface contamination deposits shall be removed. Contractor shall:
1. Clean all air handling unit (AHU) internal surfaces, components and condensate collectors and drains.
2. Assure that a suitable operative drainage system is in place prior to beginning wash down procedures.
3. Clean all coils and related components, including evaporator fins.
J. Duct Systems: Contractor Shall:
1. Create service openings in the system as necessary in order to accommodate cleaning of otherwise
inaccessible areas.
2. Mechanically clean all duct systems to remove all visible contaminants, such that the systems are capable
of passing Cleaning Verification Testing.
3.02 MECHANICAL CLEANING METHODOLOGY
A. Source Removal Cleaning Methods: The HVAC system shall be cleaned using Source Removal mechanical
cleaning methods designed to extract contaminants from within the HVAC system and safely remove
contaminants from the facility. It is the contractor’s responsibility to select Source Removal methods which
will render the HVAC system Visibly Clean and capable of passing cleaning verification methods. No cleaning
method, or combination of methods, shall be used which could potentially damage components of the HVAC
system or negatively alter the integrity of the system.
1. All methods used shall incorporate the use of vacuum collection devices that are operated continuously
during cleaning. A vacuum device shall be connected to the downstream end of the section being cleaned
through a predetermined opening. The vacuum collection device must be of sufficient power to render all
areas being cleaned under negative pressure, such that containment of debris and the protection of the
indoor environment are assured.
2. All vacuum devices exhausting air inside the building shall be equipped with HEPA filters (minimum
efficiency), including hand-held vacuums and wet-vacuums.
3. All vacuum devices exhausting air outside the facility shall be equipped with Particulate Collection
including adequate filtration to contain Debris removed from the HVAC system. Such devices shall
exhaust in a manner that will not allow contaminants to re-enter the facility. Release of debris outdoors
must not violate any outdoor environmental standard, codes or regulations.
4. All methods require mechanical agitation devices to dislodge debris adhered to interior HVAC system
surfaces, such that debris may be safely conveyed to vacuum collection devices. Acceptable methods will
include those which will not potentially damage the integrity of the ductwork, nor damage porous surface
materials such as liners inside the ductwork or system components.
B. Methods of Cleaning Fibrous Glass Insulated Components:
1. Fibrous glass thermal or acoustical insulation elements present in any equipment or ductwork shall be
thoroughly cleaned with HEPA vacuuming equipment, while the HVAC system is under constant negative
pressure, and not permitted to get wet in accordance with applicable NADCA and NAIMA standards and
recommendations.
2. Cleaning methods used shall not cause damage to fibrous glass components and will render the system
capable of passing Cleaning Verification Tests.
C. Damaged Fibrous Glass Material:
1. If there is any evidence of damage, deterioration, delaminating, friable material, mold or fungus growth, or
moisture such that fibrous glass materials cannot be restored by cleaning or resurfacing with an acceptable
insulation repair coating, they shall be identified for replacement.
2. When requested or specified, Contractor must be capable of remediating exposed damaged insulation in air
handlers and/or ductwork requiring replacement.
3. Replacement Material: In the event fiber glass materials must be replaced, all materials shall conform to
applicable industry codes and standards, including those of UL and SMACNA.
4. Replacement of damaged insulation is NOT covered by this specification.
D. Cleaning of coils
1. Any cleaning method may be used which will render the Coil Visible Clean. The drain for the condensate
drain pan shall be operational. Cleaning methods shall not cause any appreciable damage to, displacement
of, inhibit heat transfer, or erosion of the coil surface or fins, and shall conform to coil manufacturer
recommendations when available. Coils shall be thoroughly rinsed with clean water to remove any latent
residues.
E. Biocidal Agents and Coatings
1. Biocidal agents shall only be applied if active fungal growth is reasonably suspected, or where
unacceptable levels of fungal contamination have been verified through testing.
2. Application of any biocide agent used to control the growth of fungal or bacteriological contaminants shall
be performed after the removal of surface deposits and debris.
3. Only biocide agents registered by the U.S. Environmental Protection Agency (EPA) shall be used.
4. Biocidal agents shall be applied in strict accordance with manufacturer’s instructions.
5. Biocidal coating products for both porous and non-porous surfaces shall be EPA registered water soluble
solutions with supporting efficacy data and MSDS records.
6. Biocidal coatings shall be applied according to manufacturer’s instructions. Coatings shall be sprayed
directly onto interior ductwork surfaces, rather than “fogged” downstream onto surfaces. A continuous
film must be achieved on the surface to be treated by the coating application. Application of any Biocidal
coatings shall be in strict accordance with manufacturer’s minimum surface application rate standards for
effectiveness.
7. Inspection of Work Performed.
F. Contractor is to leave open all cleaning access points until they have been inspected by a representative of
Denver Public School. The contractor can call for an inspection at any time.
G. Only after each opening has been inspected can the contractor seal up the cleaning access points.
H. The interior of the supply, return and outside air ducts must be visibly clean and pass inspection in order to
satisfactorily complete the contract.
I. All air handlers need to be inspected before the access panels and doors are closed. All components of the air
handlers must pass inspection in order to satisfactorily complete the project.
END OF SECTION 23 01 30.51
SECTION 23 05 00
COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR HVAC
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 REFERENCES
A. American National Standards Institute (ANSI)
B. American Society of Mechanical Engineers (ASME)
C. National Electric Code (NEC)
D. National Electrical Manufacturer's Association (NEMA)
E. American Society of Heating Refrigeration and Air Conditioning Engineers (ASHRAE)
F. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM)
G. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA)
H. Underwriters Laboratories (UL)
1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Welder Qualifications: Welding shall be performed by ASME Certified Welders with current certificate in
accordance with ANSI B31.1 for shop and project site welding of piping work.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.05 DIELECTRIC PIPE FITTINGS AND ISOLATORS
A. Manufacturers:
1. Precision Plumbing Products: Clearflow dielectic waterway.
2. Perfection Corporation: Dielectric Waterway.
3. Victaulic.
B. Dielectic waterways:
1. Designed to meet requirements of ASTM Standard F-492.
2. Capable of continuous use at 230 F and pressures up to 300 psi.
3. IAMPO/UPC listed.
C. Dielectric fittings:
1. Water-way nipples only. No dielectric unions.
2. Dielectric flanges and kits are approved.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION
A. Access Doors:
1. Coordinate standard and fire rated access doors with the Architect.
2. 20" by 20" minimum size or larger as required for service use on mechanical equipment.
3. Locate where required for access to valves, shock absorbers, dampers, controls, mechanical equipment and
appurtenances.
B. Sleeves, Plates and Closures:
1. Protection for Insulated Pipes.
Denver Public Schools – Facility Management 23 05 00 Common Work Results for HVAC
a. When insulated pipes penetrate floors which will be covered with finish flooring, provide a sheet
metal protective covering around the insulation jacket.
b. Sheet metal shall extend above the pipe sleeve far enough to protect the insulation from bumping by
polishing machines and vacuum sweepers.
c. Space between the pipe sleeve and the sheet metal shall be sealed.
2. Floor Sleeve Heights:
a. Rooms with floor drains: Extend 2" above floor.
b. Kitchens and Mechanical Equipment Rooms: Extend 4" above floor.
c. Other areas where pipes are exposed: Extend 1/4" above floor finish material.
3. Seals:
a. Where fire rated separations are penetrated by pipes or ductwork, the annular space around the pipe or
ductwork shall be caulked with appropriate fire rated material.
C. Suspension and anchorage
1. Use of powder actuated fasteners and toggle bolts is prohibited.
2. Steel roof and floor decking, suspended ceilings, and hollow assemblies shall not be used for the
attachment of anchorages or supports for suspended equipment, pipes, or other mechanical system
components.
a. Exception: Attachment, anchorages, or supports specifically approved by a Structural Engineer.
3. Equipment shall be anchored with anchors extending through the housekeeping pad or curb into the floor,
except where the housekeeping pad is an extension of an inertia block separated from the floor structure.
4. Specify use of retaining clips/clamps in locations where vibration may be a concern.
5. Drilling, cutting or burning of, or welding to, structural members for attachment of hangers and supports is
subject to prior approval by the A/E.
6. Wall assemblies are not an acceptable replacement for hangers.
7. Signs shall be secured to a fixed device or the building wall with corrosion-resistant chains or fasteners.
D. Pipe Hangers, Supports and Guides
1. All pipe to be hung separately from structure or with trapeze hung with two hanger rods minimum.
a. No pipe shall be supported from another pipe. All pipe to be supported from building structure (deck,
beam, joist, wall and or floor).
b. The use of perforated metal and/or plastic strapping, aka “holy iron” for support on any piping
installation is prohibited.
2. Specify hanger tolerances.
3. Hangers in contact with steel, iron, cast or ductile iron shall be plated.
4. Hangers in contact with copper piping shall be copper clad or have a suitable lining to prevent electrolysis.
5. Hangers for hot and cold insulated pipe shall be installed around the outside of the insulation with saddles
and calcium silicate inserts for ½” and larger.
a. Provide galvanized metal shields, heavy density insulation inserts, and roller support points to prevent
insulation damage at these hangers.
6. Plastic piping shall be supported on continuous galvanized steel trough, with clevis hangers spaced as
required for metallic piping or as recommended by supplier.
7. Pipes that run parallel and have similar grade or pitch may be supported on trapeze hangers with spacing
determined by the smallest pipe.
8. Special pipe hanger and support provisions required for control of pipe expansion, vibration, and sound
transmission shall be in accordance with Section 15240 - Mechanical Sound and Vibration Control.
9. Gas piping installed on flat roofs shall be at code approved height supported by a MiFab model
CEW/CREW wide body base support with strut and roller. Supports shall be spaced per code based on
pipe diameter.
10. Pipe hangers shall be tightened with all hangers plumb and tight against the pipe or insulation saddle with
all adjustment nuts and lock nuts properly installed.
11. If any hangers are found to be out of plumb or not adjusted properly, the Contractor shall be responsible for
the cost of removal and reinstallation of the ceiling in order to inspect and correct the hanger installation.
E. Excavating and Backfilling: Refer to Division 32 standards.
F. Cutting and Patching: Refer to standard Section 01 73 29 Cutting and Patching.
END OF SECTION 23 05 00
SECTION 23 05 23
GENERAL DUTY VALVES FOR HVAC
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA
A. Include documentation of inspections and tests performed, including logs, curves, and certificates.
B. Documentation shall note replacement of equipment or components that failed during testing.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MANUFACTURERS AND MODELS
A. Strainers:
1. “Y” Pattern cast iron or bronze body.
2. Fusion epoxy coated cast iron – internal and external.
3. Blow off connection: 1” for sizes 2-1/2” & 3”; 1-1/2” for 4” size; 2” sizes 6” - 10”
4. Screen:
a) Sizes 2-1/2” - 4”: Type 302/304 stainless steel with 1/16” perforation.
b) Sizes 6” - 10”: Type 302/304 stainless steel with 1/8” perforation.
c) Blow off connection shall have removable plug.
d) 175 psi W.P.
B. Ball Valves:
1. Straight pattern.
2. Bronze body.
3. Stainless or chrome plated ball.
4. 300 psi W.P. @ 180°F water temperature.
C. Flanges Cast Iron, Ductile, and Bronze:
1. 250 psi min. W.P.
D. Drinking water components shall meet NSF/ANSI Standard 61 or NSF/ANSI Standard 372.
E. Ball Valves – up to 2”:
1. Bronze body, tunnel balls.
2. Acceptable manufacturers:
a) Apollo
b) Kitz
c) Hammond
d) Jamesbury
e) Jenkins
f) Milwaukee
g) Nibco
h) Watts
F. Butterfly valve acceptable manufacturers – Resilient seat gate valve 2-1/2” and above:
1. Crane
Denver Public Schools – Facility Management 23 05 23 General Duty Valves for HVAC
2. Fisher
3. Grinnell
4. Hammond
5. Jamesbury
6. Keystone
7. Milwaukee
8. Nibco
9. Posi-Seal
10. Victaulic
G. U.L., F.M. Approved or Listed Valve approved manufacturers:
1. Grinnell
2. Kennedy
3. Keystone
4. Mission
5. Mueller
6. Nibco
7. Victaulic
H. Bronze pressure-rated valve approved manufacturers:
1. Crane
2. Hammond
3. Lunkenheimer
4. Milwaukee
5. Nibco
6. Stockham
7. Walworth
I. Iron body pressure-rated valve approved manufacturers:
1. Crane
2. Kennedy
3. Lunkenheimer
4. Milwaukee
5. Mueller
6. Stockham
7. Walworth
J. Stop valves: Shall be ¼” turn ball valve type; no plastic.
K. General valve requirements:
1. Pressure rated type.
2. Either flanged or threaded ends; solder ends are not acceptable.
3. Rising stem or ball valves.
L. Gate valves, steam only: Refer to standard Section 23 22 13.
M. Balancing valves: See standard Section 23 21 13.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 VALVE APPLICATION
A. Chilled, heating, and condenser water piping:
1. Ball valves, NPS 2 and smaller: One-piece, 400-psig CWP rating, copper alloy.
2. Ball valves, NPS 2-1/2 and larger: Class 150, ferrous alloy.
3. Single-flange, high pressure flanged butterfly valves are required for dead-end service.
4. Butterfly valves, NPS 2-1/2 and larger: Flanged, 150-psig CWP rating, ferrous alloy, with EPDM liner.
5. Lift check valves, NPS 2 and smaller: Type 2, Class 125, bronze.
6. Swing check valves, NPS 2 and smaller: Type 4, Class 125, bronze.
7. Swing check valves, NPS 2-1/2 and larger: Type II, Class 125, gray iron.
8. Spring-loaded, lift-disc check valves, NPS 2 and smaller: Type IV, Class 125 minimum.
9. Spring-loaded, lift-disc check valves, NPS 2-1/2 and larger: Type I or II, Class 125, cast iron.
B. Low-pressure, compressed-air piping:
1. Ball valves, NPS 2 and smaller: One-piece, 400-psig CWP rating, copper alloy.
2. Equipment-isolation ball valves, NPS 2 and smaller: Safety-exhaust, bronze.
3. Ball valves, NPS 2-1/2 and larger: Class 150, ferrous alloy.
SECTION 23 05 48
MECHANICAL SOUND AND VIBRATION
PART 1 GENERAL
A. General acoustic criteria
1. Noise levels due to equipment and ductwork to permit attaining sound pressure levels in all 8-octave bands
in occupied spaces conforming to NC Curves: All spaces NC-35
a) Exceptions
i) Spaces within 15-foot radius of supply and return ducts from shafts: NC-40
ii) Lobbies, restrooms, common areas: NC-40
iii) Kitchens: NC-45-50
iv) Mechanical rooms: NC-50-60
B. Acoustic criteria
1. Elementary Schools
Maximum
Room Description RC(N) & NC Rating
a) General Music/Performance Room 30
b) Cafeteria/Multiuse Room 35
c) Instrumental Music/Conference Room 35
d) Private Offices 35
e) Classroom 35
f) Art Studio 35
g) Computer Lab 35
h) Conference Room 35
i) Teacher Work Room 35
j) Open Plan Office Administrative areas 40
k) Library Information Center (LIC) 40
l) Gymnasium 40
m) Corridor 50
n) Stairway 50
2. Middle Schools
Maximum
Room Description RC (N) & NC Ratings
a) Auditeria 30
b) Instrumental Music Room 30
c) Vocal Music Room 30
d) Music Practice Room (solo) 30
e) Private Offices 35
f) Classroom 35
g) Science Classroom 35
h) Art Studio 35
i) Computer Lab 35
j) Conference Room 35
k) Teacher Work Room 35
Denver Public Schools – Facility Management 23 05 48 Mechanical Sound and Vibration

l) Open Plan Office Administrative areas 40
m) Library (LIC) 40
n) Fitness Room 40
o) Gymnasium 40
p) Corridor 50
q) Stairway 50
3. High Schools
Maximum
Room Description RC(N) & NC Ratings
a) Auditorium 25
b) Stage 25
c) Auditorium Control Room 30
d) Instrumental Room 30
e) Vocal Room 30
f) Multi-Purpose Music Room 30
g) Music Practice Room (solo) 30
h) Private Offices 35
i) Classroom 35
j) Science Classroom 35
k) Computer Lab 35
l) Conference Room 35
m) Teacher Work Room 35
n) Open Plan Office Administrative areas 40
o) Stagecraft Workroom 40
p) Library (LIC) 40
q) Wrestling Room 40
r) Fitness Room 40
s) Cafeteria (Commons) 45
t) Gymnasiums 40
u) Corridor 50
v) Stairway 50
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 PIPING AND EQUIPMENT ISOLATION
A. Acceptable manufacturers
1. Amber/Booth Co.
2. Korfund
3. Mason Industries, Inc.
4. Metraflex
5. Vibration Mountings and Control Co.
6. Vibrex
B. Double-Deflection Neoprene Mountings (not required when the system is solid-mounted)
C. Spring Isolator Mountings (not required when the system is solid-mounted)
D. Restrained Spring Isolator Mountings (not required when the system is solid-mounted)
E. Vibration Hangars (not required when the system is solid-mounted)
F. Integral Structural Steel Bases (not required when the system is solid-mounted)
G. Steel Cradle Bases (not required when the system is solid-mounted)

H. Concrete Inertia Bases (not required when the system is solid-mounted)
I. Flexible Butyl Hose Pipe Connectors.
J. Flexible Neoprene Sphere Pipe Connectors.
K. Braided Flexible Pipe Connectors.
L. Acoustical Pipe Riser Anchors.
2.02 DUCT SOUND ATTENUATORS
A. Acceptable Manufacturers:
1. Acoustifoil Noise Control Products.
2. Commercial Acoustics.
3. Industrial Acoustics Company.
4. Koppers.
5. SEMCO Manufacturing.
6. TranSonics.
B. Tested and certified by an independent laboratory, such as ETL.
2.03 ACOUSTIC LOUVERS
1. Arrow United.
2. Commercial Acoustics.
3. Industrial Acoustic Company.
4. Keene Corporation.
5. Louvers and Dampers.
B. Acoustic ratings and pressure drop ratings shall be verified by copies of tests performed at an independent
laboratory.
2.04 SOUND LININGS
1. Certain-teed "Ultralite"
2. Manville
3. Owens Corning
B. Product: Fibrous glass, neoprene-coated, stenciled NFPA.
C. Minimum Thickness:
1. In ductwork: ½“
2. In plenums: 2”
D. Minimum Density:
1. In ductwork: 1.5 lb. per cu. ft.
2. In plenums: 3 lb. per cu. ft.
E. Suitable for duct velocity of 6,000 fpm.
F. Lining shall meet erosion test method described in UL-181.
2.05 ADHESIVE AND SEALER

1. Adhesive: Benjamin Foster "81-99".
2. Sealer: Benjamin Foster "82-07".
B. In conformance with NFPA 90A.
2.06 NON-HARDENING CAULKING
1. Tremco "Polybutene".
2. Manville "Duxeal".
B. Guaranteed to be permanently elastic.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION
A. Install thrust limits at centerline of thrust, symmetrical on either side of equipment.
B. Flexible connectors shall be installed to isolate vibration and shall not support piping or allow for correction for
pipe misalignment.
C. Install a spool in the place of each flexible connector during fabrication; insulation and final hangar adjustment.
Final hangar adjustment shall be completed before installing the flexible connectors

SECTION 23 05 53
IDENTIFICATION FOR HVAC
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 REFERENCES
A. American National Standards Institute (ANSI).
1. ANSI A13.1: Scheme for the Identification of Piping Systems.
2. ANSI Z53.1: Safety Color Code for Marking Physical Hazards.
B. American Society of Heating, Refrigerating and Air Conditioning Engineers (ASHRAE).
1.02 DEFINITIONS (Excerpts from ANSI A13.1-1981)
A. Materials inherently hazardous:
1. Flammable or explosive: materials which are easily ignited, including materials known as fire producers or
those creating an explosive atmosphere.
2. Chemically active or toxic: Materials which are corrosive, or are in themselves toxic or productive of
poisonous gases.
3. At temperatures or pressures: Materials which, when released from the piping, would have a potential for
inflicting injury, or property damage by burns, impingement, or flashing to vapor state.
B. Materials of inherently low hazard: Materials which are not hazardous by nature, and are near enough to
ambient pressure and temperature that people working on systems carrying these materials run little risk through
their release.
C. Fire quenching materials: This classification includes sprinkler systems and other piped fire fighting or fire
protection equipment. Includes water, chemical foam, CO2, Clean Agent, etc.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 IDENTIFICATION MATERIALS FOR PIPING AND EQUIPMENT
A. Metal tags:
1. Round brass discs, minimum 1-½" diameter, with edges ground smooth.
2. Each tag punched and provided with brass chain for installation.
B. Engraved nameplates:
1. Laminated three-layer plastic with engraved black letters on light contrasting background color.
C. Pressure sensitive markers: Brady Type 350 flexible vinyl film identification markers and tape, with legend,
size and color-coding per ANSI A13.1.
D. Semi-rigid plastic identification pipe markers: Seton Setmark with legend, size and color-coding per ANSI
A13.1. Direction-of-flow arrows are to be included on each marker, unless otherwise specified.
1. Diameters ¾" through 5": Setmark Type SNA markers.
2. Diameters 6" or larger: Setmark Type STR markers.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 IDENTIFICATION OF PIPING AND EQUIPMENT
A. General:
1. Provide pipe identification, valve tags, stencils, or engraved nameplates to clearly identify the mechanical
equipment, piping and controls of the various mechanical systems and direction of flow in piping.
B. Methods for identification:
Denver Public Schools – Facility Management 23 05 53 Identification for HVAC

1. Metal tags:
a) Stamp tags with letter prefixes to indicate service, followed by a number for location in system.
2. Engraved nameplates:
a) Attach nameplates with brass screws.
b) Pressure-sensitive embossed labels are not acceptable.
c) Nameplates shall bear the same identifying legend used on the Contract Documents.
3. Pressure-sensitive markers:
a) Apply pressure-sensitive markers with complete wrap-around.
b) Test marker adhesion for permanence.
c) Markers showing dogears, bubbles, or other failings shall be replaced.
d) Place markers at all branches and at a maximum of 25’ on center.
4. Semi-rigid plastic identification markers:
a) Seton Setmark pre-molded (not pressure-sensitive) identification markers may be used at Contractor's
option on service piping which is accessible for maintenance operations (but not on piping in finished
spaces).
b) This type of marker shall not be installed on bare pipe when surface temperature exceeds 180F unless
a 1" thick insulation band is first provided under marker for protection from the hot pipe.
C. Classification of hazards of materials, designation of colors and legend.
Classification Color of Field District Letters Legend
Flammable or Explosive:
Natural Gas Yellow Black NG
Extreme Temperatures or Pressures:
Heating Water Supply with Glycol Yellow Black HWS/G
Heating Water Return with Glycol Yellow Black HWR/G
Low-Pressure Steam Yellow Black LPS
Low-Pressure Steam Condensate Yellow Black LPSC
High-Pressure Steam Yellow Black HPS
High-Pressure Steam Condensate Yellow Black HPSC
Boiler Feed Water Yellow Black BFW
Refrigerant Yellow Black REF
Liquid or Liquid Admixture:
Chilled Water Supply with Glycol Green White CWS/G
Chilled Water Return with Glycol Green White CWR/G
Tower Water Supply Green White TWS
Tower Water Return Green White TWR
Gas or Gaseous Admixture:
Fire Lines Red White FL
D. Piping:
1. Identify all piping accessible for maintenance in crawl spaces, tunnels, above ceilings, and access spaces, as
well as exposed-to-view, utilizing stenciled markings according to the following procedures.

a) Use an arrow marker for each pipe-content legend. The arrow shall always point away from the pipe
legend and in the direction of flow. Color and height of arrow shall be same as content legend
lettering.
b) If flow can be in both directions, use a double-headed arrow indication.
c) Apply pipe legend and arrow indication at every point of pipe entry or exit where line goes through
wall or ceiling cut.
d) Apply pipe legend and arrow indication within three feet of each valve to show proper identification of
pipe contents and direction of flow.
e) The legend shall be applied to the pipe so that lettering is in the most legible position. For overhead
piping, apply legend on the lower half of the pipe where view is unobstructed, so that legend can be
read at a glance from floor level.
f) For pipes under ¾" O.D., fasten brass tags securely at specified legend locations.
g) Legends on steam piping, condensate return, compressed air, gas, and vacuum systems shall include
working pressure or vacuum.
E. Valves:
1. System service valves, including fire protection, gas, vacuum and special service valves located inside the
building shall be tagged and identified as to type of service.
2. Valves or cocks controlling branch mains or risers to various portions of the building shall be tagged and
identified as to service and location number.
F. Controls:
1. Magnetic starters and relays shall have engraved nameplates to identify connecting or controlled equipment.
2. Manual operating switches, fused disconnect switches and thermal overload switches which have not been
specified as furnished with indexed faceplates shall also have nameplates or be stenciled as to "connected"
or "controlled" equipment.
3. Automatic controls, control panels, zone valves, pressure electric, electric pressure switches, relays, and
starters shall be clearly identified.
G. Pumps:
1. Pumps shall be identified as to service and zones served.
2. Base-mounted pumps shall be stenciled or have system served nameplates.
3. Brass tags secured by tie wires may be used on small inline pumps.
H. Storage tanks, water treatment equipment and heaters:
1. Tanks and heaters shall be stenciled as to service.
2. The connecting pipes to each shall be identified and the service temperature entering and leaving the tank or
heater shall be indicated.
I. Fans:
1. Supply and exhaust fans, air handling units, and connecting ductwork supplying one or more areas from an
equipment room or isolated crawl or furred space shall have nameplate or be stenciled as to plan code
number, service and areas of zones served.
J. Air conditioning equipment:
1. Equipment such as chillers, pumps, condensers, and rooftop equipment shall be identified by system
nameplates.
2. Labels of remote equipment shall also indicate the space(s) being served and the location of their electrical
breaker (panel ID, room number and circuit).

3. Refrigeration equipment shall be labeled with the type and approximate quantity of refrigerant.
K. Access doors:
1. Provide engraved nameplates to identify concealed valves, controls, dampers or other similar concealed
mechanical equipment. Use the following colors for specified nameplates or labels.
a) Red for fire-protection devices, including dampers.
b) Blue for air-handling devices.
c) Green for plumbing devices and piping.
L. Lift-out ceilings:
1. Provide adhesive labels on ceiling grid to identify concealed valves, filters, fire/smoke dampers or similar
concealed mechanical equipment that is directly above nameplate in the ceiling space. Use the following
colors for specified labels.
a) Red for fire-protection devices, including dampers.
b) Blue for air-handling devices.
c) Green for plumbing devices and piping.
2. Equipment, including motors, shall be stenciled with the proper class-subclass code and correct unit
identification, using a contrasting color.
3. The location of fire dampers above accessible ceilings shall be identified by a red circular dot at least ¾” in
diameter or embossed tape adhered to the nearest ceiling grid member.
4. Locations of air-handling devices which have filters and are above accessible ceilings shall be identified by
a blue circular dot at least ¾” in diameter or embossed tape adhered to the nearest the nearest ceiling grid
member.
M. Terminal units>
1. Identify units with unique numbers corresponding to the drawings, and indicate the space being served.
N. Motors controlled by energy management system>
1. The District may furnish the following self-adhering signs which the Contractor shall install as indicated:
CAUTION
THIS EQUIPMENT IS
UNDER COMPUTER
CONTROL AND MAY
CYCLE AT ANY TIME.
BEFORE WORKING ON IT,
DISCONNECT THE
ELECTRICAL POWER
AND CONTACT THE
DISTRICT SERVICE
DESK AT 720-423-4020.

SECTION 23 05 93
TESTING, ADJUSTING AND BALANCING
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes: requirements for balancing the air and hydronic heating, ventilating and cooling systems to
satisfy the project building design conditions.
B. This contractor shall do the work under the general contractor.
A. Pre-qualifiedContractors:
1. Checkpoint
2. Finn & Associates
3. TAB Services
4. Griffith Engineering
5. JPG Engineering
6. Double T Balancing
7. JEDI
B. Mechanical contractor shall obtain approval in writing from balancing contractor for type and size of balancing
devices.
C. Qualifications:
1. Work under this section shall be executed under the direct supervision of a registered professional engineer
having an established professional office in the state of Colorado and having an experience record of not
less than five (5) years in the mechanical contracting industry, engaged in testing, balancing and adjusting
of air and hydronic mechanical systems for not less than two (2) years of that time.
D. Calibration and maintenance of instruments shall be in accordance with manufacturer's standards and
recommendations, and calibration histories for each instrument available for examination.
E. Accuracy of measurements in accordance with the applicable measurement means as listed in the chapter on
measurement and instruments in the latest edition of ASHRAE Fundamentals Handbook.
1. The TAB Contractor shall have obtained CAD reduced-size drawings from Engineer for the TAB report.
2. The TAB shall return to the site to perform spot checks as directed by the DPS Project Manger during the
commissioning process. The TAB shall include a minimum of 2 days on to provide spot checks as required
by the commissioning agent.
1.03 STATUS OF SYSTEMS
A. Air and water testing and balancing shall not begin until the system to be tested has been cleaned and flushed,
and is in full working order. Where glycol is used, it shall be installed prior to hydronic balancing.
1. Coordinate scheduling of work with the general contractor and appropriate subcontractors. Schedule TAB
work to coincide with testing and verification of control systems.
2. Provide written notification (within 24 hours) to the ceneral contractor, engineer, and owner or his/her
representative of any component and/or system deficiencies.
B. Review available plans and specifications for the project and make visual observations during construction to
determine that required balancing devices are being installed properly, and access to them is provided.
C. Before any air balance work is done, systems shall be checked for:
Denver Public Schools – Facility Management 23 05 93 Testing, Adjusting and Balancing

1. Excessive duct leakage. Excessive duct leakage shall be corrected.
2. Dirt and debris in ducts and/or air handling units (AHUs).
3. Filters are installed and changed if they are dirty.
4. Coil fins are clean and combed where needed.
5. Verify motor rotation and correct if necessary.
6. Excessive vibration. Excessive vibration shall be corrected.
7. Equipment has been lubricated in accordance with manufacturer’s recommendations..
8. Proper operation of automatic control and smoke dampers shall be verified.
9. Manual control dampers, fire dampers, and air outlet dampers are wide open.
10. Duct end caps are properly installed and access doors closed.
11. Grilles, registers, and diffusers are properly installed.
D. Before any hydronic balancing work is done, the system shall be checked for:
1. Proper cleaning and flushing has been completed; glycol installed when specified.
2. Dirty strainers have been cleaned.
3. Correct pump rotation has been verified.
4. Proper control valve installation and operation.
5. Proper system static pressure to assure a completely filled system.
6. Air in system eliminated.
7. Proper flow meter and check valve installation.
8. Manual balancing devices, control and shut-off valves are open.
E. Put heating, ventilating, and air conditioning systems and equipment into full operation and continue operation
of same during each working day of testing and balancing.
F. For remodels and additions, TAB shall include the entire system being worked on. TAB of an extended or
modified branch only shall not be accepted.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 EQUIPMENT
A. Provide all instruments, tools, scaffolding, and ladders necessary to perform the work.
B. Provide a set of instruments and tools necessary to balance the hydronic system for the District.
3.02 PERFORMANCE OF WORK
A. Air Balance:
1. Balance air supply, return, and exhaust systems and record air quantities for each air device.
a) The pilot tube traverse method for determining main duct CFM shall be used and recorded wherever
possible; flow hood measurements at registers and diffusers may be totalized for branch duct quantities.
2. Air diffuser pattern shall be set to minimize objectionable drafts and noise.
3. The supply, return, and exhaust fan static pressures shall be set by the balancing firm (and the controls
contractor if the systems have fan volume control).
a) The lowest fan speed resulting in satisfactory system performance shall be determined at full design
delivery. Any inlet or outlet fan volume (balancing) dampers shall be in the wide-open position, and
one path presenting the greatest resistance to flow shall be fully open and unobstructed.

b) Fan RPMs shall not be increased by more than 10 percent without prior authorization from the
engineer.
c) All adjustable speed sheaves on multiple-belt systems shall be replaced with fixed-speed sheaves by the
balancing contractor. Sheaves shall be provided by mechanical contractor.
4. Provide system static pressure profiles that identify pressure differences across all components of air
handling units and built-up systems. Pressure drops shall be individually measured and recorded for intake
and exhaust vents, hoods, louvers, manual and auto control dampers, filters, coils, evaporative coolers, fans,
etc.
a) On systems with OSA economizers, pressure drop values shall be recorded for both minimum and 100
percent OSA modes.
5. Building static pressure adjacent to entries shall be measured and recorded. Adjust systems to maintain a
positive pressure of 0.05” w.c. where possible. Note any discrepancies.
6. When air balancing is done and manual dampers are set, all test holes shall be plugged and all manual
damper positions shall be marked.
B. Hydronic Balance:
1. Converters: record all steam and/or water inlet and outlet temperatures, pressure drops, and flows.
2. Record inlet and outlet water temperatures of all AHU coils, unit heaters, convectors, finned tube radiation,
and other heat release equipment, as well as the corresponding media flows and pressure drops.
3. Boilers: provide data for boiler operating conditions and thermal efficiencies. (Provide a copy of the
independent testing agency report if testing is not performed by the TAB Contractor.) The TAB Contractor
shall measure water side temperatures, pressures, and flow rates if so requested by owner and/or boiler
testing agency.
4. Chilled water systems: measure and record chilled and condenser inlet and outlet fluid temperatures,
evaporator and condenser fluid pressure drops and flows, full-load motor running voltage and amperage,
chiller refrigerant pressures and temperatures.
5. DX cooling systems: record condensing unit full and part-load amperages, condenser fan(s) rotation and
running amperage(s), high and low side refrigerant pressures, coil inlet and outlet air temperatures at full-
load condition. Verify operation of condenser fan and head pressure controls.
6. Hydronic pumps: record flow rates, pressures, running amperage, and full-load amperage at design flow and
shutoff conditions. Verify and record impeller size and shutoff head.
7. When all hydronic balancing is done, all balancing valve positions shall be marked and the locking devices
set. Control valve bypass loops (where used) shall be set with the balancing valve to provide equal flow in
either mode.
8. Domestic Water Balance
a) Domestic pumps: record flow rates, pressures, running amperage, and full-load amperage at design
flow and shutoff conditions. Verify and record impeller size and shutoff head.
b) When all domestic balancing is done, all balancing valve positions shall be marked and the locking
devices set. Control valve bypass loops (where used) shall be set with the balancing valve to provide
equal flow in either mode.
C. Electric Heat:
1. Record full-load and part-load (when staged) amperage and voltage of all electric heating elements.
2. Verify that electric heat is locked out when the flow rate drops below minimum requirements.
D. Smoke Systems:
1. Test all smoke management systems per Chapter 4 of the latest version of NFPA 92A.
2. Refer to Division 23 Controls, for smoke management sequences.

3. Leave systems in proper working order, replacing belt guards, closing access doors, closing doors to
electrical switch boxes, and restoring thermostats to specified settings.
3.03 SYSTEM TOLERANCES
A. Allowable tolerances:
1. Tolerances of adjustment for air handling systems:  5 percent for supply systems and  10 percent for
return and exhaust systems from figures shown on drawings.
2. Tolerances of adjustment for hydronic systems:  10 percent of design conditions shown on drawings.
3.04 TAB REPORT

A. The report shall include all test and balance data, as well as information on any discrepancy from specifications
or performance standards. All discrepancies shall be included in a separate section. As a minimum, the
following items shall be included:
1. Belt and drive sheave information (as installed and as changed), fan nameplate information, motor
nameplate information, and amperage and voltage to all motors (in various operating modes where
applicable). Also, maximum and minimum RPM settings on VFD units.
2. Static pressure drops across all components of the air systems. Static pressure profile for each AHU
system.
3. Required and final balanced CFM at each system terminal unit. Include the terminal size, inlet static
pressure, temperature, and velocities read to attain the required CFM.
4. Pump and motor nameplate information, amperage and voltage to all motors, flow and pressure drop across
all system terminals, pressure rise across the pump in psi and feet of head, both operating and shut-off, and
maximum operating GPM.
5. Refrigerant system operating amperages, pressures, and temperatures.
6. Overload protection data for all motors shall be recorded. Starter and/or VFD brand, model, enclosure
type, installed overload devices, original ratings and set points (and revised device ratings and set points
when applicable) shall be recorded. If the starters (and/or VFDs) were furnished by the mechanical
contractor, the overloads shall be verified and changed to the correct size when necessary, and so noted in
the report. If the starters were furnished by the electrical contractor, the correct overload device sizes and
settings shall be noted in the report and the electrical contractor shall be advised of all discrepancies.
B. A reduced set of drawings (11” x 17”) shall be included in the report with all terminals (VAV boxes, air outlets,
inlets, coils, unit heaters, finned tube loops, radiant panel loops, etc.) clearly marked, all equipment designated,
and all referenced to the device test reports. The contract drawings may be reduced and used for this purpose, if
they remain legible. Otherwise, CAD reduced-size drawings shall be obtained from the engineer.
C. The TAB contractor shall submit bound copies of the final TAB report to the owner or his/her representative at
least 15 days prior to the mechanical contractor’s request for final inspection. The report shall include all
operating data as previously listed, a list of all equipment used in TAB work, and shall be signed by the
supervising professional engineer or certified TAB supervisor and certified TAB technician, and affixed with his
certification seal. Final acceptance of this project will not take place until a satisfactory report is received.
3.05 FIELD VERIFICATION
A. Upon request of the owner or engineer, a representative of the balancing firm performing the work shall
demonstrate fluid flow quantities shown in the report by reading back outlets or terminals selected at random. It
is understood that the operating mode of the system shall be the same for the readback as it was during
balancing, and the number of readings verified will not exceed 10 percent of the total in the report.
B. When deemed necessary by the owner or engineer, the balancing firm shall run temperature, pressure, and/or
humidity recordings, and shall be prepared to verify any of the report test results in the presence of the owner
and/or engineer when requested.

SECTION 23 07 00
HVAC INSULATION
PART 1 GENERAL
A. Installer qualifications: Three years minimum successful installation experience on projects with mechanical
insulation similar in scope and nature to that required for the project.
1.02 PERFORMANCE CRITERIA
A. Insulation and accessory materials shall meet the following criteria:
1. Insulation Materials: Non-combustible as defined in National Fire Protection Association Pamphlet 220
and Underwriters' Laboratory Listed or Labeled.
2. Flame/Smoke Ratings: Composite mechanical insulation (insulation, jackets, coverings, sealers, mastics
and adhesives) flame-spread rating 25 or less, smoke-developed rating 50 or less, as tested by ANSI/ASTM
E-84 (NFPA 255) method.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 APPROVED MANUFACTURERS
A. Armstrong
B. Certain-Teed
C. Knauf
D. Manson
E. Owens Corning
F. Schuller (Johns-Manville)
2.02 MATERIALS
A. Insulation:
1. Fiberglass.
2. Flexible Closed-Cell.
B. Adhesives, Sealers, Facings and Vapor Barrier Coatings must be able to accept paint where painting is required.
2.03 JACKETS
A. Puncture resistance rating based on ASTM D781 test method.
B. Permeance ratings based on ASTM E96, Procedure A.
C. Type AA-1 jacket:
1. Material: T3003, H14 to H19 aluminum alloy.
2. Thickness: 0.016” (0.4mm), minimum.
3. Factory applied to insulation with 1 mil thick polyethylene moisture barrier continuously laminated across
full width of jacketing.
4. Seal: Integral longitudinal Pittsburgh seam with butt joint strips and weatherproof mastic.
5. Approved manufacturer: Insul-Coustic “Alcorjac” or equivalent.
D. Type GFR-1 jacket:
1. Material: Heavy-duty, fire-retardant, glass fiber reinforced material with self-sealing lap.
Denver Public Schools – Facility Management 23 07 00 HVAC Insulation

2. Factory applied to insulation.
3. Finish: White vinyl or white kraft suitable for painting.
4. Bench puncture resistance: 50 units minimum.
5. Permeance: 0.02 perms, maximum
6. Vapor barrier: 0.001" aluminum foil adhered to inner surface of jacket.
7. Approved manufacturer: Owens Corning Type ASJ or equivalent.
E. Type GFR-2 jacket:
1. Material: Heavy-duty, fire-retardant, glass fiber reinforced material.
2. Factory applied to insulatio.
3. Finish: White vinyl or white kraft suitable for painting.
4. Bench puncture resistance: 25 units minimum.
5. Permeance: 0.02 perms, maximum.
6. Vapor barrier: 0.001" aluminum foil adhered to inner surface of jacket.
7. Approved manufacturer: Owens Corning type ASJ or equivalent.
F. Type GFR-3 jacket:
1. Material: Glass fiber reinforced.
2. Factory applied to insulation.
3. Finish: White kraft.
4. Bench puncture resistance: 15 units, minimum.
5. Permeance: 0.01 perms, maximum.
6. Vapor barrier: Aluminum laminated to inner surface of jacket.
7. Approved manufacturer: Owens Corning type FRK or equivalent.
G. Type GF-1 jacket:
1. Material: 20 x 20 mesh glass fabric.
2. Embed in coat of lagging adhesive; finish with second coat of lagging adhesive.
3. Approved manufacturers: Manville “Duramesh” Type 205 or equivalent.
H. Banding:
1. Over aluminum jacketing with insulation less than 13" diameter: Stainless steel, 1/2" x 0.020.
a) Approved manufacturer: AJ Gerrard & Co., No. 305-SS with No. 202-SS seals.
2. Maximum spacing 12" on center.
2.04 PIPING INSULATION MATERIALS
A. Fire-retardant, moisture- and mildew-resistant, and verminproof.
B. Suitable to receive jackets, adhesives, and coatings as indicated.
C. Glass fiber insulation: Inert inorganic material, noncorrosive to mechanical surfaces, preformed into flexible or
rigid board as indicated, suitable for temperatures to 450ºF.
D. Insulation blankets shall be the same surface temperature as the rest of the pipe.
E. Jackets shall have all seams turned under, double stitched.
F. Insulating cement:
1. Dry density 34 lb/cu ft, thermal conductivity 0.91 Btu-in/hr-sq ft-ºF at 400ºF.

2. Approved manufacturers:
a) PK “Super Stick”.
b) Ryder “GP”.
G. Filling and finishing cement:
1. Dry density 40 lb/cu ft, thermal conductivity 0.89 Btu-in/hr-sq ft-ºF at 400ºF.
2. Approved manufacturers:
a) PK “Quick Cote”
b) Ryder “MW”
H. Rigid fiberglass insulation (RFG):
1. ASTM C547, Class 1.
2. Temperature rating: -20 to 850ºF only for pipe insulation.
3. Density: 3 lb/cu ft.
4. Conductivity: Not more than 0.24 Btu-in/hr-sq ft-ºF at 75ºF.
5. Approved manufacturers: Owens Corning “Fiberglas 25” or equivalent.
I. Mineral wool fiber pipe insulation (MW):
1. ASTM C547.
2. Temperature rating: 1,200°F.
4. Conductivity: Not more than 0.45 Btu-in/hr-sq ft-°F at 450°F.
5. Approved manufacturers: Roxul 1200 or equivalent.
J. Cellular glass pipe insulation (CG):
1. ASTM C552, Type II, Class 2.
2. Temperature rating: -450°F to 900°F.
3. Density: 7.5 lb/cu ft.
4. Conductivity: Not more than 0.29 Btu-in/hr-sq ft-°F at 75°F.
5. Approved manufacturers: Pittsburgh Corning Foamglas or equivalent.
K. Elastomeric thermal insulation (ET):
1. ASTM C534, Type 1 for piping materials; Type II for sheet materials.
2. Temperature rating: -40 to 220º.
3. Density: 5.5 lb/cu ft.
4. Conductivity: Not more than 0.27 Btu-in/hr-sq ft-ºF at 75°F.
5. Permeance: 0.19 perms per inch.
6. Approved manufacturers: Armstrong “Armaflex II” or equivalent.
L. Expanded urethane insulation (EU):
1. ASTM C591.
2. Temperature rating: -100ºF to 220ºF.
2.05 HVAC DUCTWORK INSULATION

A. Fire-retardant, moisture- and mildew-resistant, and verminproof.
B. Suitable to receive jackets, adhesives, and coatings as indicated.
C. Flexible fiberglass insulation (FFG)
1. ASTM C553, Type I.
2. Density: 3/4 lb/cu ft.
4. Vapor transmission rating shall not exceed 0.02 perms.
5. Approved manufacturers: Owens Corning Type 75P “Ductwrap” or equivalent.
D. Rigid Duct Liner (RDL):
1. Use of duct liner is prohibited except in short, open-ended air transfer ducts.
2. ASTM C1071, ASTM G 21, and ASTM G 22.
3. Meet requirements of NFPA 90A and 90B.
4. For service at internal air velocities not to exceed 4,000 fpm.
5. Dimensions indicated on the drawings shall be finished inside dimensions.
6. Fabrication and installation shall conform to manufacturer’s recommendations and to the requirements of
the latest edition of Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors National Association (SMACNA)
Standard, HVAC Duct Construction Standards – Metal and Flexible (hereinafter referred to as SMACNA
HVAC DCS).
7. 1" thick.
8. Duct liner shall have a pigmented coating on the air stream side to resist damage during installation and in
service. Edges shall be factory coated with the same pigmented coating to comply with SMACNA HVAC
DCS.
10. Approved manufacturers: Owens Corning “Duct Liner Board” or equivalent.
2.06 FLUE GAS DUCTWORK AND EQUIPMENT INSULATION
A. Fiberglass insulation (EFG):
1. ASTM C553, Type I.
2. Density: 3/4 lb/cu ft.
4. Vapor transmission rating shall not exceed 0.02 perms.
5. Approved manufacturers: Owens Corning “High Temperature Flexible Batt Insulation” or equivalent.
B. Ceramic fiber insulation (CF):
1. Temperature rating: 1000F to 2700F.
4. Approved manufacturers: Unifrax Corporation “Fiberfrax Durablanker 2600” or equivalent.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION
A. Do not insulate cleanouts, access openings or identification plates.
B. Neatly bevel insulation and finishes up to edges of openings, and seal edges.

C. Hangers shall be plumb and tight against the pipe or insulation saddle with adjustment nuts and lock nuts
installed If hangers are found to be out of plumb or not properly adjusted, the contractor shall be responsible
for the cost of removal and reinstallation of the ceiling in order to inspect and correct the hanger installation.
D. Provide saddles and shields under pipe hangers.
E. Prepare a schedule of mechanical insulation showing systems insulated, types, thickness for various sizes,
temperatures and special conditions. Include saddles and shields per standard Section 23 05 00. Include
schedule on drawings or include in specifications.
F. Heating system insulation:
1. Heating water supply and return.
2. Heat exchangers, converters, air separators, storage tanks and receivers.
3. Low, medium, and high pressure steam piping.
4. Steam condensate and boiler feed water (Exception: When good engineering practice precludes insulation
where cooling of condensate is desirable to avoid cavitation of condensate return pumps. Also refer to
standard Section 23 21 23 hydronic pumps.).
5. Fittings.
6. Valves (Exception: Specify factory-made removable insulation covers on high and medium pressure steam
applications on all valves, strainers, and bucket traps.).
G. Chilling system insulation:
1. Chilled, dual temperature and heat recovery water supply and return.
2. Heat reclaim coil header.
3. Fittings.
4. Valves.
5. Cold condensate drain piping (first 10 feet).
6. Chiller water boxes.
7. Refrigerant and brine piping below 40 degree F.
8. Refrigerant hot gas piping (only within buildings or where exposure is likely to cause accidental burn
injury)
9. Cold water thermal storage tanks.
H. Air distribution system insulation:
1. Exterior surfaces of outside air, combustion air, mixed air, and recovery coil discharge.
2. Exterior surfaces of supply and return air ducts.
3. Exterior surfaces of exposed supply ductwork.
4. Concealed supply ductwork.
5. Rigid spiral supply air ductwork.
6. Kitchen exhaust ductwork or chase, whichever is more viable.
I. Other system insulation:
1. Engine exhaust and muffler inside building.
2. Piping with heat tracer exposed to freezing.
J. Protective jackets:
1. Provide protective jackets where piping insulation is exposed to weather and where abrasion is likely.
3.02 INSULATION SCHEDULE

A. Minimum insulation thicknesses shall comply with IECC 2015.
3.03
Insulation Jacket Insulation

Item
Type Type Thickness
Heating Water Return Piping (125ºF) RFG GFR-1 1-1/2”
Heating Water Supply Piping (190ºF) RFG GFR-1 2”
Steam Heating Piping (<400°F) (<6” dia.) CS AA-1 5”
Chilled Water Piping (45ºF) RFG GFR-1 1”
Condenser Water Piping (65°F) RFG AA-1 1”
Refrigerant Suction Piping ET --- 1”
Outside Air Ductwork Exposed RFG GFR-2 1-1/2”
Outside Air Ductwork Concealed FFG GFR-3 1"
Mixed Air Ductwork and Plenum FFG GFR-2 1"
Exposed Supply Ducts in Equipment Room FFG GFR-2 1"
Concealed Supply Ducts FFG GFR-3 1-1/2"
Return and Relief Ducts in Equipment Room FFG GFR-2 1"
Air Separators RFG GF-1 2-1/2"
Expansion Tanks RFG GF-1 1"
Make-up Tanks RFG GF-1 1"
Heat Exchangers CS GF-1 3-1/2"
Condensate Receivers CS GF-1 3-1/2"
Flash Tanks RFG GF-1 3-1/2"
Storage Tanks RFG GF-1 2"
Chiller Evaporator Shell ET --- 1-1/2"
Chilled Water Boxes RFG GF-1 1-1/2"
Evaporative Humidifier RFG GFR-2 1"

SECTION 23 08 00
COMMISSIONING FOR HVAC
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 CONTRACTOR REQUIREMENTS
A. The commissioning responsibilities applicable to the mechanical Contractor, commissioning authority (CA),
control system contractor, and others are outlined in Section 230800 - Commissioning. This section covers the
specific commissioning tasks required. Commissioning shall be provided in this section and as required by the
AHJ in accordance with the 2015 IECC.
1.02 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Preparation of mechanical equipment for operation including cleaning, lubrication, and final alignment.
B. Testing to verify compliance with requirements of contract documents.
C. Perform testing of mechanical equipment, control station equipment, balancing of distribution system, and
adjustment of systems of project.
D. Sound measurement of equipment at operating conditions.
E. Vibration measurement of equipment at operating conditions.
1.03 SUBMITTALS
A. Provide submittal documentation relative to commissioning to the CA as requested by the CA.
B. Schedule of equipment and system start-up to Engineer, DPS, and CA.
C. Results of vendor’s shop and field tests.
D. Required documentation as required by Code, the AHJ, and listed within the contract documents and herein.
E. Equipment and instrumentation calibration certification or documentation for all test instruments.
F. Documentation that the vendor’s storage and handling requirements were met for all equipment and materials.
G. Results of air pressure test for boiler setting and ductwork.
H. Results of hydrostatic test for boiler, pressure vessels and piping systems.
I. Boil out procedure for steam boiler and results.
J. Equipment vendor’s recommendations for:
1. Alignment tolerances.
2. Allowable vibration levels.
3. Lubrication requirements.
4. Cleaning procedures.
K. Observed installation data:
1. Alignment readings.
2. Operating vibration levels.
3. Test and inspection reports.
L. Results of potable water tests including chemical test showing residual chlorine in plumbing system of less than
10 ppm.
M. Results of water testing results and final chemical concentrations for boiler feedwater, condenser water, chilled
water, and hydronic systems.
N. Certification of backflow preventer assemblies from testing agency.
Denver Public Schools – Facility Management 23 08 00 Commissioning for HVAC

O. Certifications for storm and sanitary sewer as required by Denver Water.
P. Instrument calibration reports in duplicate for each instrument and control loop:
1. Include instrument calibration data and status of equipment.
2. Note any deficiencies yet to be corrected on instruments that are suitable for operation (e.g. broken lenses,
faulty local indicators on transmitters that can still perform correct output transmission, etc.). Contractor
shall correct these deficiencies at earliest possible date.
3. Each calibration report shall be signed by vontractor's representative witnessing test.
Q. At completion of Work, vontractor shall submit to DPS certification that equipment has been tested and
commissioned, and is in operating condition in accordance with contract documents.
R. Final Reports: Refer to Section 01915 for final report requirements.
A. Contractor shall perform specified services with qualified personnel, or employ and pay for qualified
organization to perform specified services.
B. Contractor shall provide calibrated instruments required for commissioning and testing operations.
1. Make instruments available to engineer to facilitate spot checks during testing
2. Retain possession of instruments; remove from site at completion of services
C. Test equipment shall have calibration checks by equipment vendor or authorized facility to assure accuracy of
commissioning process every six months.
D. Furnish material, tools, and labor required to perform start-up of each respective item of equipment, instrument
and system.
E. Coordinate the startup of equipment and systems with existing operations or facility equipment so that it does
not affect owner’s operations.
F. Nondestructive examination of pressure part welds shall be in accordance with ASME Boiler and Pressure
Vessel Code – Section V.
G. Provide equipment vendor's authorized service representative to inspect and approve installation where required
in individual specification sections.
H. Comply strictly with specified vendor's, engineer's, and CA’s procedures in starting up and commissioning
specified systems.
1.05 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate startup, testing and commissioning services of the various trades to ensure rapid completion of
services.
B. Promptly report to engineer and CA any deficiencies noted during performance of commissioning and testing
services.
1.06 JOB CONDITIONS
A. Prior to start of testing and commissioning, verify that required "job conditions" are met:
1. Systems installation is complete and in full operation
2. Ambient conditions are within reasonable range relative to design conditions
3. Special equipment such as computers, laboratory equipment, and electronic equipment are in full operation
B. Verify that requirements for preparation for testing and balancing have been met for elements of each of systems
that require testing.

PART 2 PRODUCTS – No Requirements
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 INSTRUMENTS
A. Register, grille, and diffuser readings: "Anemotherm" by Anemostat Products Div., Dynamics Corp. of
America, or "Velometer" by Alnor Instrument Co., Div. of Illinois Testing Laboratories, Inc., within the past 6
months.
B. Duct velocity readings: Pitot tube and inclined manometer with scale appropriate for value of readings to be
taken.
C. Duct dry and wet bulb temperatures: Dial type thermometers with scale graduations of 1 degree or less.
Minimum 2" (50 mm) diameter scale. Minimum bulb length of 5" (125 mm). Type of wick for wet bulb
thermometer to be approved in advance.
D. Area dry and wet bulb thermometer: Glass, with maximum scale graduations of 1 degree. Type of wick for wet
bulb thermometer shall be approved in advance.
E. Flow gauges in piping may be used to obtain water flow data in branch piping where such gauges are furnished.
F. Calibrate thermometers before and after testing.
G. Maintain instruments and equipment in good working order during testing.
3.02 EQUIPMENT CLEANING
A. When no longer required, thoroughly clean equipment of temporary protective coatings and foreign materials.
B. Remove excess shipping accessories including packing, shipping bolts, temporary blocking, crating, and
banding.
C. Remove construction debris including temporary supports, shims, scaffolding, etc.
D. Perform cleaning procedures recommended by equipment vendor.
3.03 INSPECTION
A. Inspect equipment installations and verify in writing status of work meets requirements for starting equipment
including, but not limited to, the following:
1. Lubrication type, quantity, and date.
2. Proper drive rotation before connecting coupling, belts, or chains.
3. Proper belt tension.
4. Check out of wiring and control systems.
5. Proper instrument control range.
6. Proper motor and electric device voltage ratings.
7. Proper alignment and running clearances.
8. Coupling guards, belt guards, etc., in place.
9. Control systems operational
10. Equipment, including coils, tubes, drums, hoppers, ducts, and breeching: Internals clear of shipping
materials, packing, blocks, construction debris, welding rod, etc.
11. Auxiliary services connected, i.e., cooling water, alarm and trip circuits, and safety devices.
12. Proper damper operation and clearance for damper drive linkage travel.
13. Proper clearance for thermal expansion.
14. Instrumentation calibration.
B. Engineer, owner, and CA reserves right to witness contractor's inspections.

3.04 ADJUSTING
A. Check equipment for alignment after piping and duct connections have been made and before equipment is
placed in operation. Equipment shall be rechecked for alignment after reaching operating temperature.
B. Align equipment so that at operating temperatures, shaft angular (coupling face) misalignment and shaft parallel
misalignment does not exceed vendor's recommendations.
C. Alignment settings shall be recorded and copies provided to engineer.
D. After initial operation, accessory equipment supports shall be drilled, reamed, and fastened in place on baseplate
using tapered dowel pins to maintain permanent alignment.
E. Variable and constant spring hangers shall be adjusted to appropriate cold settings prior to operation. Monitor
movement during initial operation to verify calculated load and travel are adequate. Perform necessary
adjustments.
F. Monitor movement of expansion joints during initial operation to verify calculated travel. Perform necessary
adjustments.
G. Make other adjustments necessary on equipment furnished in order to properly place equipment into operation.
3.05 EQUIPMENT VIBRATION BALANCING
A. Rotating equipment shall be dynamically balanced at vendor’s shop. Field assembled rotating equipment shall
be dynamically balanced. Balancing procedure in accordance with vendor's instructions.
B. Balance rotating equipment if operating vibration exceeds "good" region as shown on "General Machinery
Vibration Severity Chart" by IRD Mechanalysis or vendor's recommendations, whichever is more stringent.
C. Vibration readings at startup will be conducted by contractor.
3.06 LUBRICATION
A. Lubricate bearings and fill oil reservoirs prior to operation. Perform lubrication in accordance with vendor's
recommendations.
B. Lubricants for initial operation, storage, and flushing shall be furnished by contractor.
C. After contractor lubricates equipment, contractor shall affix tag to equipment stating lubricant used, quantity,
date lubricated, and name of person lubricating equipment.
3.07 GENERAL MECHANICAL SYSTEMS
A. Pre-Functional Testing and Inspection:
1. Perform water testing in accordance with AHJ for potable water systems.
2. Review test certificates of reduced pressure backflow preventer assemblies. Testing shall be performed by
a certified backflow technician.
3. Verify steam, hot water, condensate, chilled water or DX piping is connected to cooling coils, pressure
tested, cleaned, and chemical treatment performed (as applicable).
B. Plumbing:
1. Confirm roof drains are open and unobstructed.
2. Confirm operation at each plumbing fixture and availability of hot/cold water.
3. Confirm operation of each plumbing specialty item through its full range of operation.
4. Confirm automatic operation of water heaters, air separators and expansion tanks.
5. A smoke test shall be performed on sanitary vent lines prior to applying wall finishes. The test shall be
witnessed by the DPS representative.
6. System Flushing:
a) Before operational tests or disinfection, potable piping systems shall be flushed with potable water

b) Sufficient water shall be used to produce a minimum velocity of 2.5 feet/sec through the piping.
Flushing shall continue until all the dirt and other material are removed and the water is not discolored.
Drain the system at low points
7. Operational tests shall be performed after flushing and before disinfecting. Operational tests shall last not
less than 8 hours for each system and shall included the following:
a) Time, date, and duration of the test.
b) Water pressure at most remote and highest fixture.
c) Operation of each fixture and trim.
d) Operation of each valve, hydrant, and faucet.
e) Pump suction and discharge pressure (if applicable).
f) Temperature of domestic water supply.
g) Operation of each floor and roof drain (if applicable) by flooding with water
h) Operation of each vacuum breaker and backflow preventer.
i) Operation of the water booster system including pump start and stop pressure (if applicable).
j) Compressed air reading at each compressor inlet and outlet.
k) Laboratory piping shall be tested in accordance with the vendor’s recommendations.
8. Disinfection:
a) After flushing and operational testing is complete, the domestic hot and cold water system shall be
disinfected with chlorinated water. The chlorination procedure shall be in accordance with AWWA
M20.
b) The water shall remain in the system for a minimum of 24 hours.
c) Each valve shall be opened a minimum of 2 times during the testing period to ensure proper
disinfection.
d) After disinfection the piping system shall be flushed so that not more that 25 ppm of chlorine is present.
Testing of chlorine content shall occur within 1 hour of taking sample.
C. Verify control valves and damper actuators are installed; control power is energized; and valves and dampers
are operable.
D. Bearings:
1. Inspect for cleanliness; clean and remove foreign materials.
2. Verify alignment.
3. Replace defective bearings, and those that run roughly or noisily.
4. Grease as necessary, and in accordance with vendor's recommendations.
E. Drives:
1. Adjust tension in V-belt drives, and adjust variable pitch sheaves and drives for proper equipment speed.
2. Adjust drives for alignment of sheaves and V-belts.
3. Clean; remove foreign materials before starting operation.
4. Perform operational testing of variable frequency drives (VFDs) for all equipment, including air handling
units, pumps, fans, etc.
F. Motors:
1. Check each motor for amperage comparison to nameplate value.
2. Check motor bearing temperatures and vibration during run in.

3. Correct conditions which produce excessive current flow, and which exist due to equipment malfunction.
G. Fans:
1. Inspect and verify proper mounting of fan.
2. Check motor interlocks, control system contactors and motor protection devices.
3. Confirm adequate fan and motor bearing lubrication.
4. Verify unobstructed rotation of fan.
5. “Bump test” to verify correct rotation of fan.
6. Check sheaves for alignment and adjust belt tension (if required).
7. Replace defective bearings and those that run roughly.
8. Operate fan motor uncoupled for 1 hour to perform “run-in” on motor. Check for excessive vibration on
fan motor.
9. Couple fan to motor and operate for 1 hour, minimum. Check for vibration on fan assembly. Rebalance fan
or replace components as necessary to allow fan to run smoothly and within vendors recommended
vibration limits.
H. Pumps:
1. Check mechanical seals for cleanliness and adjustment before running pump.
2. Confirm adequate pump and motor bearing lubrication.
3. Inspect shaft sleeves for scoring.
4. Inspect mechanical faces, chambers, and seal rings; replace if defective.
5. Verify that piping system is free of dirt and scale before circulating liquid through pump.
6. Check expansion joints for proper installation before running.
7. Check sealing fluid supply for flushed mechanical seals.
8. Check impeller for correct installation and direction of rotation.
I. Piping systems:
1. Tighten flanges after system has been placed in operation. Replace flange gaskets that show any sign of
leakage after tightening.
2. Inspect screwed joints for leakage.
a) Promptly remake each joint that appears to be faulty; do not wait for rust to form.
b) Clean threads on both parts, apply compound, and remake joints.
3. After system has been placed in operation, clean strainers, dirt pockets, orifices, valves seats, and headers in
fluid systems, to assure they are free of foreign materials.
4. Open air vents; remove operating elements. Clean thoroughly, replace internal parts and put back into
operation.
5. Remove any rust, scale, and foreign materials from equipment and renew defaced surfaces.
6. Repair damaged insulation.
7. Vent gasses trapped in any part of systems.
8. Check piping for leaks at every joint, and at every screwed, flanged, or welded connection.
J. Control valves:
1. Inspect both hand and automatic control valves; clean bonnets and stems.
2. Tighten packing glands to assure no leakage, but permit valve stems to operate without galling.

3. Replace packing in valves to retain maximum adjustment after system is judged complete.
4. Replace packing on any valve that continues to leak.
5. Remove and repair bonnets that leak.
6. Coat packing gland threads and valve stems with surface preparation of anti-rust compound after cleaning.
K. Heat Exchangers:
1. Observe testing of pressure relief valves and review test results.
2. Field hydrostatic test pressure parts and connecting piping in accordance with ASME Boiler and Pressure
Vessel Code or Tubular Exchanger Manufacturer’s Association (TEMA) (as applicable),. Submit proper
certificates after testing is complete. Testing shall be performed prior to insulating of heat exchanger.
3. Measure and record flow and temperature of entering and leaving water. Adjust to obtain required output.
4. Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and equipment.
3.08 ENVIRONMENTAL SYSTEMS
A. Reference Specification Section 15990, “Testing, Adjusting and Balancing” and “HVAC Controls”, paragraph
below for additional requirements.
B. Computer Room Air Conditioning:
1. Vendor's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to inspect, test, and adjust field-
assembled components and equipment installation, including connections, and to assist in field testing.
Report results in writing.
2. Perform the following field tests and inspections and prepare test reports:
a) Inspect for and remove shipping bolts, blocks, and tie-down straps.
b) After installing computer-room air-conditioning units and after electrical circuitry has been energized,
test for compliance with specification requirements.
c) Operational Test: After electrical circuitry has been energized, start units to confirm proper motor
rotation and unit operation.
d) Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and equipment.
C. Air Handling Units with Coils:
1. Vendor's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to inspect field-assembled
components and equipment installation, including piping and electrical connections. Report results in
writing.
a) Leak Test: After installation, fill water and steam coils with water and test coils and connections for
leaks. Repair leaks and retest until no leaks exist.
b) Charge refrigerant coils with refrigerant and test for leaks. Repair leaks and retest until no leaks exist.
c) Fan Operational Test: After electrical circuitry has been energized, start units to confirm proper motor
rotation and unit operation. Remove malfunctioning units, replace with new units, and retest.
D. Packaged Heating and Cooling Rooftop Equipment:
1. Vendor's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to inspect test, and adjust field-
Report results in writing and deliver to DPS Project Manger.
2. Perform the following field quality-control tests and inspections and prepare test reports:
a) After installing rooftop air conditioners and after electrical circuitry has been energized, test units for
compliance with requirements.
b) Inspect for and remove shipping bolts, blocks, and tie-down straps.

c) Operational Test: after electrical circuitry has been energized, start units to confirm proper motor
3. Remove malfunctioning units, replace with new units, and retest as specified above.
E. Air Terminal Units:
1. Perform the following field tests and inspections and prepare test reports:
a) After installing air terminal units and after electrical circuitry has been energized, test for compliance
with requirements.
b) Leak Test: after installation, fill water coils and test for leaks. Repair leaks and retest until no leaks
exist.
c) Operational Test: after electrical circuitry has been energized, start units to confirm proper motor
d) Test and adjust controls and safeties. replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and equipment.
2. Remove and replace malfunctioning units and retest as specified above.
F. Geothermal Systems:
1. Field hydrostatic test pressure parts and connecting piping in accordance with piping code. Submit
certificates after testing is complete. Testing shall be performed prior to insulating field joints.
2. Vendor's Field Service: engage a factory-authorized service representative to inspect test, and adjust field-
Report results in writing and deliver to DPS Project Manger.
3. After installing computer-room air-conditioning units and after electrical circuitry has been energized, test
for compliance with specification requirements.
4. Operational Test: after electrical circuitry has been energized, start units to confirm proper motor rotation
and unit operation.
5. Test and adjust controls and safeties: replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and equipment.
G. Air Cooled Condensing Units:
1. Verify chilled water piping or DX piping is connected to cooling coils, pressure tested, cleaned, and
chemical treatment performed (as applicable).
2. Condenser Fans:
a) Check motor interlocks, control system contactors and motor protection devices.
b) Confirm adequate fan and motor bearing lubrication.
c) Verify unobstructed rotation of fans.
d) “Bump test” to verify correct rotation of fan.
e) Check sheaves for alignment and adjust belt tension (if required).
f) Replace defective bearings and those that run roughly.
3. Compressors:
a) Verify compressor outlet pressure.
b) Check adequate lubrication for compressor and motor bearings.
c) Check vibration levels on compressor.
4. Operational Test: After electrical circuitry has been energized, start units to confirm proper unit operation.

H. Exhaust Fans:
1. Operational Test: after electrical circuitry has been energized, start units to confirm proper unit operation.
Test fan sfor rotational speed, total cfm and static pressure.
2. Test and adjust controls and safeties: replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and equipment.
I. Makeup Air Units:
1. Operational Test: after electrical circuitry has been energized, start units to confirm proper unit operation.
Test fans for rotational speed, total cfm and static pressure.
3. Confirm interlocks with kitchen hoods, exhaust fans and other air handling equipment.
3.09 STEAM BOILERS
1. Review burner commissioning test report from burner vendor.
B. Air pressure test boiler setting and ductwork; submit procedure to ENGINEER prior to test. Provide necessary
equipment and materials required for testing including fans, compressed air, blank-off plates, gaskets, and
bracing. System shall be pressurized to 10" water gauge (w.g.) (2.5 kPa). Test pressure shall not decrease more
than 10% in 10 minutes after sources of incoming air are shut off.
C. Field hydrostatic test pressure parts and connecting piping in accordance with Section I of ASME Boiler and
Pressure Vessel Code and ASME B31.1 Power Piping Code. Submit proper ASME certificates after testing is
complete. Testing shall be performed prior to insulating field joints.
D. Boilout:
1. Flush tubes and headers to remove weld slag, dirt and construction debris.
2. Boiler shall be cleaned by boiling out in manner that will remove of grease, oil, and other organic
compounds.
3. Provide temporary gaskets on manholes and handholes for boilout; after boilout replace with new gaskets
for operation. Spare gaskets specified shall not be used for this purpose.
4. Furnish and install chemicals required for boilout.
5. Provide service engineers (if required by vendor) and construction labor as required for boilout.
6. Furnish and install temporary equipment required for boilout, including but not limited to, temporary piping
required to fill and drain boiler, temporary gauge glass, and other temporary instruments.
7. Contractor will provide labor to dispose of cleaning solution.
E. Commissioning:
1. Forced Draft (FD) and Induced Draft (ID) Fans:
a) Inspect and verify proper mounting of fan.
b) Check motor interlocks, control system contactors and motor protection devices.
c) Confirm adequate fan and motor bearing lubrication.
d) Verify unobstructed rotation of fan.
e) “Bump test” to verify correct rotation of fan.
f) Check sheaves for alignment and adjust belt tension (if required).
g) Replace defective bearings and those that run roughly.
h) Operate fan motor uncoupled for 1 hour to perform “run-in” on motor. Check for excessive vibration
on fan motor.

i) Couple fan to motor and operate for one (1) hour, minimum. Check for vibration on fan assembly.
Rebalance fan or replace components as necessary to allow fan to run smoothly and within vendors
recommended vibration limits.
2. Flue Gas Recirculation (FGR) Damper:
a) Verify manual and automatic actuation of damper.
b) Verify unobstructed, full range of motion.
c) Verify orientation of damper blades.
d) Verify tight closure of damper.
3. Controls:
a) Check controls to maintain individual boiler operation.
b) Check automatic shutdowns, safety shutdowns, low water cutouts and alarms.
c) Verify burner operation for a turn down of 10:1 on natural gas and 8:1 on fuel oil.
d) Check field instrumentation versus control system display.
e) Inspect boiler control panel for operation of controls and indicating lights.
f) Provide boiler stack analysis to verify full load and part load thermal efficiency.
g) Verify operation of plant master for the control of multiple boilers.
F. Measure and record steam output at full load, half load, and quarter load conditions. Adjust to maintain
required output.
3.10 HOT WATER BOILERS
1. Review burner commissioning test report from burner vendor.
2. Observe testing of pressure (water) relief valves and review test results.
B. Field hydrostatic test pressure parts and connecting piping in accordance with Section I or Section IV of ASME
Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code (as applicable), and ASME B31.1 Power Piping Code. Submit proper ASME
certificates after testing is complete. Testing shall be performed prior to insulating field joints.
C. Commissioning:
1. Forced Draft (FD) or Induced Draft (ID) Fan:
b) Check motor interlocks, control system contactors and motor protection devices.
c) Confirm adequate fan and motor bearing lubrication.
d) Verify unobstructed rotation of fan.
e) “Bump test” to verify correct rotation of fan.
f) Check sheaves for alignment and adjust belt tension (if required).
g) Replace defective bearings and those that run roughly.
h) Operate fan motor uncoupled for one (1) hour to perform “run-in” on motor. Check for excessive
vibration on fan motor.
i) Couple fan to motor and operate for one (1) hour, minimum. Check for vibration on fan assembly.
Rebalance fan or replace components as necessary to allow fan to run smoothly and within vendors
recommended vibration limits.
2. Controls:
a) Activate control system for automatic/manual boiler start sequence.

b) Start boiler water pump, establish flow, and activate boiler proof of flow switch.
c) Start boiler internal circulation pump.
d) Verify low water cutoff safety and water makeup supply.
e) Verify operation of temperature and pressure gauges. Operate high-pressure limit control.
f) Verify burner operation for a turn down of 4:1 on natural gas.
g) Check controls to maintain individual boiler operation.
h) Check automatic shutdowns, safety shutdowns, low water cutouts and alarms.
i) Inspect boiler control panel for operation of controls and indicating lights.
j) Check field instrumentation versus control system display.
k) Provide boiler stack analysis to verify full load and part load thermal efficiency.
l) Verify operation of plant master for the control of multiple boilers.
D. Measure and record flow and temperature of hot water. Adjust to obtain required output.
3.11 STEAM PIPING
1. Review installation of piping, valves and accessories for conformance to drawings.
B. Field hydrostatic test piping in accordance with ASME B31.1 Power Piping Code. Testing shall be performed
prior to insulating field joints.
C. Commissioning:
1. Perform flushing of piping and clean filters at final acceptance.
2. Clean strainers, dirt pockets, orifices, valve seats and blow down steam traps.
3. Valves
4. Check valve bonnets for leakage; tighten as necessary.
5. Verify manual and automatic actuation of process control valves.
6. Pipe Supports.
7. Check support location and installation prior to filling of system.
8. Check and adjust support after filling of system.
9. Check piping during operation for leaking flanges, joints or connections, vibration or unusual movement.
10. Check expansion joints after piping system reaches operating temperature for binding, squirm or unusual
movement.
11. Replace flange gaskets that show any sign of leakage after tightening.
12. Verify all flange gaskets are metal impregnated flexatallic type gaskets. Garlock or Neoprene gaskets shall
be rejected and replaced prior to placing system into service.
13. Repair any damaged insulation.
3.12 HOT WATER SUPPLY & RETURN PIPING
1. Review installation of piping, valves and accessories for conformance to drawings.
C. Commissioning:

2. Clean strainers, dirt pockets, and valve seats.
3. Valves
4. Check valve bonnets for leakage; tighten as necessary.
5. Verify manual and automatic actuation of process control valves.
6. Pipe Supports
7. Check support location and installation prior to filling of system.
8. Check and adjust support after filling of system.
10. Replace flange gaskets that show any sign of leakage after tightening. Repair any threaded joints that show
any sign of leakage.
3.13 CONDENSATE PIPING
1. Review installation of piping, valves, tank and accessories for conformance to drawings.
2. Review condensate pump installation alignment results.
C. Commissioning:
6. Valves
a) Check valve bonnets for leakage; tighten as necessary.
b) Verify manual and automatic actuation of process control valves.
7. Pipe Supports
a) Check support location and installation prior to filling of system.
b) Check and adjust support after filling of system.
8. Tank
a) Verify cleanliness of tank.
b) Observe level indicator and confirm proper operation.
3.14 MAKEUP WATER SYSTEM
2. Perform integrity check of bed support or retainers for dealkalizers and water softeners.

B. Field hydrostatic piping in accordance with ASME B31.1 Power Piping Code. Testing shall be performed prior
to insulating field joints.
C. Commissioning:
1. Check all level instrumentation for proper operation.
2. Check automatic operation of control system.
3. Check automatic backflush.
4. Verify brine concentration for flow to dealkalizers and softeners (~12% salt solution).
5. Check mixers and metering pump operation for chemical feed system.
6. Check operation of chemical feed systems to:
a) Boilers.
b) Steam distribution system.
c) Cooling towers/condenser water system.
d) Chilled water system.
7. Perform quality tests on samples of:
a) Steam.
b) Condensate.
c) Chilled water.
d) Brine solution.
3.15 BOILER FEEDWATER SYSTEM
1. Review installation of piping, valves, deaerator and accessories for conformance to P&IDs.
2. Review feed water pump installation alignment results.
C. Commissioning:
2. Valves
a) Check valve bonnets for leakage; tighten as necessary.
3. Pipe Supports:
4. Deaerator:
a) Verify cleanliness of tank.
b) Observe level indicator and confirm proper operation.

3.16 NATURAL GAS SYSTEM
A. Review installation of piping, valves and accessories for conformance to P&IDs.
B. Blow out piping to remove debris.
C. Review piping pressure test results.
D. Witness gas solenoid safety valve operational test.
E. Clean dirt pockets.
F. Check piping during operation for leaking flanges, joints or connections, vibration or unusual movement.
G. Replace flange gaskets that show any sign of leakage after tightening.
H. Record pressure on both sides of regulator.
3.17 PUMPS
1. Verify pumps are fully installed with baseplate grouted securely in foundation and isolation devices (if
required) are functional.
2. Check for adequate lubrication for pump and motor bearings.
3. Review pump installation alignment results.
4. Check mechanical seals for cleanliness and adjustment.
5. Verify seal flush flow and quantity.
7. “Bump test” to verify correct rotation of pump.
8. Replace defective bearings and those that run roughly.
9. Clean inlet strainer.
10. Check for pump “soft foot.”
B. Commissioning:
1. Confirm individual pump flow and head after startup. Adjust as required.
2. Confirm pump flow and head in combination with other equipment.
3. Check motor FLA at design operation conditions.
4. Correct conditions that cause excessive current draw by the motor or inadequate flow or head from the
pump.
5. Check vibration levels for radial vibration (2 planes) and axial vibration.
6. Measure sound level at a distance of 3’ (1 m) from operating equipment.
3.18 CHILLED WATER/CONDENSER WATER
1. Review pressure test results (evaporator and condenser).
3. Measure and record refrigerant that is loaded into chiller (pounds).
4. Verify that equalizer and overflow piping is open and not restricted (cooling tower).

5. Review installation of piping, cooling towers, pumps, chillers, valves and accessories for conformance to
P&IDs.
B. Field hydrostatic test chiller, chilled water and condenser water piping in accordance with ASME B31.1 Power
Piping Code. Testing shall be performed prior to insulating field joints.
C. Commissioning:
1. Piping:
a) Perform flushing of piping and clean filters at final acceptance.
b) Vent air from system and confirm filling of piping system.
a) Repair any damaged insulation.
4. Valves:
a) Check valve bonnets for leakage. Tighten as necessary.
5. Pipe Supports
6. Measure sound level at a distance of 3’ (1 m) from operating equipment.
D. Water Chillers:
1. Refrigerant:
a) Check refrigerant leak detection and automatic shut down system.
b) Check refrigerant recovery piping and storage tank.
c) Record volume (mass) of refrigerant that is installed in chiller.
3. Compressor:
a) Verify compressor outlet pressure.
b) Check adequate lubrication for compressor and motor bearings.
c) Check vibration levels on compressor.
4. Oil Pump:
a) Check for adequate lubrication for pump and motor bearings.
b) “Bump test” to verify correct rotation of pump.
c) Replace defective bearings and those that run roughly.
d) Check motor FLA at design operation conditions.
5. Controls:
a) Activate control system for automatic/manual chiller start sequence.
b) Start chilled water pump, establish flow, and activate evaporator proof of flow (differential pressure)
switch.
c) Start condenser water pump, establish flow, and activate condenser proof of flow (differential pressure)
switch.
d) Verify control system energizes chiller start sequence.

e) Verify operation of temperature and pressure gauges and control system monitoring of temperature and
pressure.
f) Verify operation of flow instrumentation.
g) Verify chiller thermal load within system, confirm chilled water set point.
h) Inspect chiller control panel for operation of controls and indicating lights.
i) Check field instrumentation versus control system display.
j) Check automatic shutdowns and alarms.
k) Check field instrumentation versus control system display.
l) Verify chiller shutdown sequence after thermal load is removed.
6. Operate chiller through full range of loads from local control panel and control system.
7. Confirm and record chiller efficiency (kW/ton) at 100%, 75%, and 50% operation.
E. Cooling Tower:
5. Fan:
b) Confirm adequate fan and motor bearing lubrication.
c) Check sheaves for alignment and adjust belt tension (if required).
d) Replace defective bearings and those that run roughly.
e) Verify unobstructed rotation of fan.
f) “Bump test” to verify correct rotation of fan.
g) Perform “Run-in test” to check for excessive vibration.
6. Review fill for damage; replace fill as required to allow unrestricted airflow into the tower.
7. Check basin level instrumentation and makeup water float operation.
8. Controls:
a) Activate control system for automatic/manual cooling tower start sequence.
b) Verify operation of temperature and pressure gauges and control system monitoring of temperature and
pressure.
c) Verify operation of flow instrumentation.
d) Verify condenser water thermal load within system; confirm condenser water set point.
e) Check field instrumentation versus control system display.
f) Check fan vibration switch and low oil level alarms.
g) Check cooling automatic shutdowns and alarms.
h) Check field instrumentation versus control system display.
9. Operate cooling tower through full range of loads from control system.
3.19 HVAC CONTROLS (see also “Instrumentation Systems”, this section)

A. Verify control devices are in place, operable, calibrated and communicating with local control panels and
operator workstations.
B. System Power:
1. Test and verify power supplies, wiring, low voltage transformers, and related interlocks are available and
meet the requirements of the Contract Documents.
2. Check wiring continuity and voltage drops to most remote points in system.
3. Verify power to the UPS and shutdown power to the EMS/DDC and confirm automatic transfer to the UPS
and 1-hour of operation.
4. Remove power from control units and verify that the configuration properly reloads automatically upon
restoration of power.
C. Verify that control software program has been loaded, edited and is operational.
D. Review configuration of the logic in each controller against the Sequence of Operations.
E. Verify installation and configuration of I/O against Contract Documents.
F. Operator Work Stations:
1. Verify that any operator workstation can be taken out of service without loss of facility control.
2. Verify graphics screens against both soft and hard I/O.
3. Verify operation of operator workstation and control of HVAC systems.
4. Verify report and alarm generation meets requirements of Owner.
5. Verify self-diagnostics operate and report properly.
G. Test each control loop for:
1. Full range and span of input/output.
2. Proper display on process, trend and alarm graphic screens.
3. Response on loss of signal.
4. Testing of control/feedback mismatch.
H. Confirm controls operation for HVAC systems for:
1. Start up of each HVAC system.
2. Space occupied.
3. Night and weekend set-back.
4. Warm-up cycle.
5. Modulation of control valves and dampers.
6. Space temperature control.
7. Emergency condition operation including power failure.
I. Verify automatic shutdown of systems (particularly operation of the firestat duct sensor at each AHU.)
J. Verify operation of fire-smoke dampers and automatic reset (if applicable).
3.20 INSTRUMENT PIPING
A. Branch instrument air headers shall be blown down and leak tested prior to introducing air to the instrument.
B. Blow down header to remove moisture, foreign particles, etc. Larger outlets shall be blown down first; then
proceed to smaller outlets, until all supply lines have been cleaned.
C. Pressurize headers to 120 psig (830 kPa) and hold to confirm system is tight. Perform repairs to headers and
retest until leaks are eliminated.

D. Blow down and test pneumatic tubing circuits to confirm continuity, tightness and elimination of leaks.
Disconnect tubing from instruments when blowing down each circuit.
E. Reconnect instrument (if instrument has suitable pressure rating) and pressurize tubing to 35 psig (240 kPa) to
confirm system is tight. Perform repairs to tubing circuits to eliminate leaks.
F. If instrument air is not available at time of commissioning, supply instrument quality air from portable
compressor, bottled dry air, or nitrogen for testing.
3.21 INSTRUMENTATION SYSTEMS
A. Commission controls and instruments prior to start-up to assure in-situ performance in accordance with
specifications under simulated operating conditions. Contractor to determine initial start-up conditions.
B. Remove shipping stops from instruments before starting with procedures listed herein. Contractor shall have
instruction manuals available, and shall install miscellaneous components such as charts, illumination, etc.,
which have been supplied separately but are integral parts of equipment.
C. If any doubt exists as to correct method for calibrating or checking calibration of instrument, vendor's printed
recommendations shall be used.
D. Many instruments contain small supply pressure gauges or output pressure gauges. Calibration of these gauges
will not be required. However, if gauge is found to be defective, instrument involved shall be immediately
called to attention of owner and reporting of its condition confirmed in writing.
E. If any instrument cannot be properly adjusted, it shall be immediately called to attention of owner and report of
its condition confirmed in writing.
F. Instrument check: Verify data on nameplate with respect to conditions of range, operating temperature, specific
gravity, and components as stated on unit specifications. Any discrepancies shall be immediately called to
attention of owner and report of condition confirmed in writing.
G. Verify that control valve seats are free from foreign material, and are properly positioned for intended service.
H. Loop checks:
1. Verify wiring from instrument back to control system. Check wiring tagging matches wiring diagrams.
2. Check continuity of conductors and polarity.
3. Verify calibration range of each instrument and compare to required range for process.
4. Contractor shall maintain written record of all loop checks.
I. Test procedures:
1. Check handswitches, pushbuttons, and pilot lights.
2. Check interlocking circuits installed for conformance to schematic diagrams and "Sequence of Operation".
3. Perform work of placing in initial operation equipment installed or wired under this contract, following
instructions and recommendations of equipment vendors.
a) After energizing and prior to start-up, check control circuits for proper sequence of operation and
interlocking functions.
b) Wiring changes required as result of such checks shall be properly identified by changing terminal strip
and/or wiring markers.
4. Contractor shall provide necessary construction labor to make equipment final adjustments that are required
to place systems in good operating condition, and furnish labor to assist in solving instrument or control
problems.
5. Contractor shall calibrate instruments and components in accordance with vendor's calibration data over full
operational range, prove instruments to be within published specification, accuracy, and affix calibration
sticker. Instruments shall be calibrated individually and where applicable, as system (i.e., control loop
transmitter, controller, and valve). Components that have adjustable features shall be carefully set for

specific conditions and applications of this project. Each calibration sticker shall be signed by contractor's
representative witnessing test.
6. Calibration sticker shall contain the following information:
a) Equipment identification tag number.
b) Range of calibration.
c) Date and name of person doing calibration.
7. Pressure gauges: Shall be checked at 10%, 50%, and 90% of their ranges for linearity within vendor's
stated specifications.
8. Gauges not meeting vendor's specifications shall be repaired or replaced.
9. Dial thermometers shall be checked at mid-range and ambient temperature. Thermometers not meeting
vendor's specifications shall be repaired or replaced.
10. Temperature switches: calibrate in accordance with vendor's specifications.
11. Valves and Operations:
a) Control Valves:
i) Inspect both hand and automatic control valves; clean bonnets and stems.
ii) Tighten packing glands to assure no leakage, but permit valve stems to operate without galling.
iii) Replace packing in valves to retain maximum adjustment after system is judged complete.
iv) Replace packing on any valve that continues to leak.
v) Remove and repair bonnets that leak.
vi) Coat packing gland threads and valve stems with surface preparation of anti-rust compound after
cleaning.
vii) Operation of control valve shall be verified within limits of practicality. Particular attention must
be given to vendor's instructions and applicable nameplate data in reference to valve spring scale
and actuation conditions. Pay close attention to bench set.
b) Valve action: check valve action for conformance to specifications (open or closed on air or power
failure).
c) Valve positioner: check for conformance to specifications relative to spring action and input range
(particularly for split range applications), valve action, and length of stroke. If valve positioner is fitted
with standard characterized cam, check to see if proper cam is mounted. Do not cut or modify standard
cam.
d) Check valve position with a signal input of 0%, 25%, 50%, 75%, and 100%. Check valve opening
corresponds to the input signal. If position feedback is available, check that feedback indication
corresponds to the input signal.
12. Panel-mounted instruments:
a) Receiver instruments: check zero and span at 0%, 25%, 50%, 75%, and 100% of range by impressing
measured signal into input or signal connections or instrument.
b) Controllers:
i) Controllers shall be checked for proper operation and adjusted in accordance with vendor's
instructions. Vary process input signal and check output signal for direction.
ii) Set initial proportional band, reset rate, and rate time as recommended by vendor. It may be
necessary to determine process dynamics in actual operation before settings can be made.
iii) Control loops shall be observed for operability and conformance to specifications by impressing
simulated input signal at primary element and checking response of final control element.

13. Controllers; field mounted: Simulate "Set Point" and "Measured Variable" signals at controller, with
separate regulated signals.
14. Acceptable calibration standards:
a) Vacuum or draft:
i) 0" to 5" w.c. (0 kPa to 1.25 kPa): inclined water filled manometer graduated in tenths and inches
of water (kPa).
ii) 5" to 25" Hg (17 kPa to 85 kPa): precision test pressure gauge, 0-30” Hg (0-102 kPa), ¼ of 1%
accuracy, 6” (150 mm) dial.
iii) 5" to 60" H20 (1.25 kPa to 15 kPa): water manometer graduated in inches of water (kPa).
b) Pressure:
of water (kPa).
ii) 5" to 60" w.c. (1.25 kPa to 15 kPa): water manometer graduated in inches of water (kPa).
iii) 3 to 25 psig (20.7 kPa to 175 kPa): precision test pressure gauge, 0-30 psig (0-210 kPa), ¼ of 1%
iv) 25 to 150 psig (175 kPa to 1050 kPa): precision test pressure gauge, 0-200 psi (0-1500 kPa), 1/4
of 1% accuracy, 4-1/2" (115 mm) dial minimum.
v) 150 to 750 psig (1050 kPa to 5200 kPa): precision test pressure gauge, 0-800 psi (0-5500 kPa),
1/2 of 1% accuracy, 4-1/2" (115 mm) dial minimum.
c) Differential:
of water (kPa).
ii) 5" to 300" w.c. (1.25 kPa to 75 kPa): water manometer graduated in inches of water (kPa).
iii) 5 to 25 psig (34 kPa to 175 kPa): precision test pressure gauge, 0-30 psig (0-210 kPa), ¼ of 1%
iv) Above 25 psig (175 kPa): use pressure gauges listed above.
d) Temperature:
i) -40 to 250ºF (-40°C to 220°C): laboratory thermometers of suitable range.
ii) Other ranges: use thermocouple and precision potentiometer.
15. Digital instruments:
a) Instruments designed to transmit signals via a digital protocol (BACNet) shall be calibrated using a
handheld communications device, laptop computer, or through a DDC console.
b) Verify calibration data, tag information, and other programmable parameters.
c) Verify wiring from the instrument to the correct control system I/O, when calibration is performed in
the field.
3.22 SAFETY AND ALARM SYSTEMS
A. Verify operation of emergency notification and alarm systems. Verify notification at fire alarm control panel
(FACP).
B. Perform pneumatic, hydrostatic, and final tests of fire suppression system.
C. Perform hydrant flow test to confirm sufficient water supply for all hydrants.
D. Verify anti-freeze to water solution ratio in fire suppression system as applicable.
E. Verify operation of emergency signals, sensors and detectors.

F. Verify operation of fire suppression system for wet pipe and dry pipe systems. Verify foam concentration for
fire suppression systems in fuel oil storage area.
G. Verify operation of refrigerant leak detection equipment shutdown and start of ventilation fans.
H. Verify operation of fire-smoke dampers and automatic reset (if applicable).
I. Witness third party testing of backflow prevention devices for plumbing, irrigation and fire protection systems.
J. Witness functional testing of kitchen hood controls, including fan operation and fire alarm and suppression
system.
3.23 LIGHTING CONTROLS
A. Lighting controls shall be comissioned as required in division 26 and as required by the AHJ in the 2015 IECC.
3.24 SERVICE WATER HEATING
A. Service water heating equipment and domestic water circulating pumps and controls shall be commissioned as
required in this section and as required by the AHJ in the 2015 IECC.
3.25 ACCEPTANCE FOR OPERATION
A. Each piece of equipment installed by this contract shall carry "Acceptance for Operation Checklist." Each
checklist shall be signed by the contractor's representative and DPS, or owner's representative. Each list shall
have applicable blanks filled in and attached to items indicating that it is prepared for operation.
B. Owner will accept equipment and systems for operation when construction has been substantially completed by
contractor. "Acceptance for Operation" shall mean owner will assume operational and routine maintenance
duties. "Acceptance for Operation" does not relieve contractor from responsibilities related to defective
materials and workmanship; neither does it constitute final acceptance of materials and equipment.
C. After owner has accepted a system for operation, contractor shall continue to perform following as requested
and scheduled by owner at no additional cost to owner until final acceptance:
1. Troubleshooting, adjustments, and repairs until system operation and performance is accepted by owner.
2. Assist instrument and control personnel with instrument calibration.
3. Craft labor as required.
D. After owner has accepted a system for operation, contractor shall continue to supply technical services when
needed until final acceptance by owner.

SECTION 23 11 23
NATURAL GAS PIPING
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SUBMITTALS
A. Quality Assurance Data:
1. Welding: Qualify processes and operators according to ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code, Section
IX.
2. Electrical Components and Devices: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing
agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for intended use.
3. NFPA Standard: Comply with NFPA 54, "National Fuel Gas Code."
B. Project Record Documents:
1. As-Built Shop Drawings:
a) Gas piping system layout including each gas load connected to the system.
b) Certified elevation and outline drawings with dimensions.
c) Certified plan view drawings with dimensions.
d) Wiring and termination drawings.
C. Operation and Maintenance Data:
1. Include documentation of inspections and tests performed, including logs, curves, and certificates.
2. Documentation shall note replacement of equipment or components that failed during testing.
1.02 COMMISSIONING
A. Provide record of commissioning and tests for automatic gas solenoid safety valve operation.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 PIPING MATERIALS
A. Interior Exposed or Accessible:
1. Size 1/2" thru 1-1/2":
a) Pipe: Schedule 40, ASTM A53/A53M or most current.
b) Fittings: Threaded malleable iron.
c) Joint seal: Rector seal or teflon paste.
d) Unions: Black malleable iron ground joint, bronze to iron seat, 150 lb. class, ANSI B2.1 and ASTM
A197.
2. Size 2" and over:
a) Pipe: Schedule 40, ASTM A53, Type S Grade B.
b) Fitting: Butt weld ASTM A234.
c) Unions: 150 lb. forged steel weld neck flange, ANSI/B16.5 and ASTM A105.
B. Interior concealed non accessible and air plenums:
1. Pipe and fittings welded.
2.02 GAS SOLENOID SAFETY VALVES
A. Manufacturer: Automatic Switch Company (ASCO).
2.03 GAS SAFETY VALVE CABINETS
Denver Public Schools – Facility Management 23 11 23 Natural Gas Piping

A. #4 stainless steel finish fully recessed, Series S construction, Style K stainless steel door with cylinder lock, four
keys each cabinet, all cabinets keyed alike.
B. Modify cabinets for 6" maximum depth for valve sizes 1/2" thru 1-1/2", and 8" maximum depth for valve size 2"
thru 3".
C. Manufacturer: Croker Model 9100 modified for valve depth.
2.04 FLEXIBLE HOSE GAS CONNECTORS AND QUICK COUPLERS
A. Flexible Connector – Kitchen Equipment:
1. Corrugated type 304 stainless steel flexible pipe with stainless steel braid and heavy flexible armor shield.
2. Manufacturers:
a) Dormont “Blue Hose” kit w/restraint or equal
b) Thermo Tech Co., braided flexible connectors with armor shield, approved for gas, and of lengths
required for fixed or movable equipment.
3. Couplings: Provide at each end of flexible connector, "Hanson Gas Mate" 2-way shut-off couplers and
plugs.
2.05 PRESSURE REGULATORS
A. Single stage and suitable for fuel gas service.
B. Include steel jacket and corrosion-resistant components, elevation compensator, and atmospheric vent.
C. Manufacturers:
1. American Meter Company.
2. Donkin, Bryan RMG Canada, Ltd.
3. Eclipse Combustion, Inc.
4. Fisher Controls International, Inc.; Division of Emerson.
5. Invensys.
6. Maxitrol Company.
7. National Meter Industries, Inc.
8. Richards Industries, Inc.; Jordan Valve Div.
9. Schlumberger Limited; Gas Div.
D. Line Pressure Regulators: ANSI Z21.80 with 2-psig- minimum inlet pressure rating.
2.06 VALVES
A. Non-Lubricated Eccentric Plug Valve acceptable manufacturers:
1. Keystone
B. Lubricated Plug Valves:
1. Not recommended.
2. Acceptable manufacturers, if allowed:
a) Homestead
b) Nordstrom
c) Powell
d) Walworth
C. Gas Cock approved manufacturers:
1. Crane
2. Hammond

3. Peter Healy
4. Alternate: Milwaukee "Butterball"
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 SERVICE ENTRANCE PIPING
A. Install dielectric fitting downstream from and adjacent to each service meter unless meter is supported from
service-meter bar with integral dielectric fitting. Install shutoff valve downstream from and adjacent to
dielectric fitting. Dielectric fittings are specified in Division 23.
3.02 INSTALLATION
A. Utility Company will provide gas service up to and including the meter.
1. Exterior fuel gas distribution system piping, service pressure regulator, and service meter will be provided
by gas utility.
2. Natural gas distribution system piping, service pressure regulator, and service meter are specified in
elsewhere.
B. Concealed Locations: Except as indicated otherwise, install concealed gas piping in airtight conduit constructed
of Schedule 40, seamless, black steel pipe with welded joints. Vent conduit to exterior and terminate with
screened vent cap.
C. Above-Ceiling Locations: Gas piping may be installed in accessible spaces, subject to approval of the
Authorities Having Jurisdiction (AHJ), whether or not such spaces are used as plenums. Do not locate valves
above ceilings.
D. In Floors: Gas piping shall not be installed in floors.
E. In Floor Channels: Gas piping may be installed in floor channels, subject to approval of the AHJ. Channels
must have covers and be open to space above cover for ventilation.
F. In Partitions: Do not install concealed piping in solid partitions. Protect tubing from physical damage when
installed inside partitions or hollow walls.
1. Exception: Tubing passing through partitions or walls.
G. In Walls: Do not install gas piping in exterior walls.
1. Exception: Tubing passing through partitions or walls.
H. Prohibited Locations: Do not install gas piping in or through circulating air ducts, clothes or trash chutes,
chimneys or gas vents (flues), ventilating ducts, or dumbwaiter or elevator shafts.
I. Drips and Sediment Traps: Install drips at points where condensate may collect. Include outlets of service
meters. Locate where readily accessible for cleaning and emptying. Do not install where condensate would be
subject to freezing.
1. Construct drips and sediment traps using tee fitting with bottom outlet plugged or capped. Use minimum-
length nipple of 3 pipe diameters, but not less than 3 inches long, and same size as connected pipe. Install
with space between bottom of drip and floor for removal of plug or cap.
J. Conceal pipe installations in walls, pipe spaces, utility spaces, above ceilings, below grade or floors, and in floor
channels, unless indicated to be exposed to view.
1. Install fuel gas piping at uniform grade of 0.1 percent slope upward toward risers.
2. Use eccentric reducer fittings to make reductions in pipe sizes. Install fittings with level side down.
3. Connect branch piping from top or side of horizontal piping.
4. Install unions in pipes NPS 2 and smaller, adjacent to each valve, at final connection to each piece of
equipment, and elsewhere as indicated. Unions are not required on flanged devices.
5. Install strainer on inlet of each line pressure regulator and automatic and electrically operated valve.
6. Select location of gauges from options in paragraph below or delete.
7. Install flanges on valves, specialties, and equipment having NPS 2-1/2 and larger connections.

8. Piping to be threaded schedule 40 steel pipe. Each regulator vent to terminate separately.
9. Install containment conduits for gas piping below slabs, within building, in gastight conduits extending
minimum of 4 inches outside building, and vented to atmosphere. Prepare and paint outside of conduits
with coal-tar, epoxy-polyamide paint.
10. Terminate vents with turned-down, reducing-elbow fittings with corrosion-resistant insect screens in large
end.
K. Pipe Identification
1. Paint atural gas piping located outside the building.
2. Natural gas piping located inside the building shall be identified as required by Specification Section
230553 Mechanical Idendification.
3.03 JOINT CONSTRUCTION
A. Basic piping joint construction is specified in Division 23.
B. Use materials suitable for fuel gas.
C. Brazed Joints: Make with brazing alloy with melting point greater than 10000F. Brazing alloys containing
phosphorus are prohibited.
D. Patch factory-applied protective coating as recommended by manufacturer at field welds and where damage to
coating occurs during construction.
3.04 Valve Schedule
A. Gas Solenoid Safety Valves:
1. Provide for classroom laboratories and kitchens.
2. Kitchen valve de-energized when fire suppression system is activated.
3. Reset of kitchen valve only possible after fire suppression system has been reset, re-charged and in "ready "
mode.
4. Gas solenoid safety valves shall not be located in plenums .
5. Gas solenoid valves shall be mounted in a horizontal position only.
6. Valve bonnet shall be up, in the vertical position with unions on each side of the valve.
B. Flexible Hose Gas Connectors and Quick Couplers except at Science classrooms.
1. Provide flexible stainless steel connectors with full size quick coupler for kitchen and heavy movable gas
appliance equipment.
2. Connectors of lengths required to displace equipment for complete cleaning under and around gas
appliance.
3. Provide plug valve at service connection on equipment branch and quick coupler at service end of flexible
hose connector.
4. Provide union connection on appliance or manifold end of hose connection.
C. Gas (small appliance isolation only):
a) All sizes: A.G.A. rated ball valves or gas cocks

SECTION 23 21 13
HYDRONIC PIPING
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data:
1. Provide for each type of special-duty valve indicated. Include flow and pressure drop curves based on
manufacturer's testing for diverting fittings, calibrated balancing valves, and automatic flow-control valves.
B. Project Record Documents:
1. Shop drawings:
a) Detail fabrication of pipe anchors, hangers, special pipe support assemblies, alignment guides,
expansion joints and loops, and their attachment to the building structure. Detail location of anchors,
alignment guides, and expansion joints and loops.
b) Welding certificates: Copies of certificates for welding procedures and personnel.
c) Field test reports: Written reports of tests specified in Part 3 of this Section. Include the following:
i) Test procedures used.
ii) Test results that comply with requirements.
iii) Failed test results and corrective action taken to achieve requirements.
1. Hydronic specialties and special-duty valves.
1.02 Permits
A. All field welding is subject to permitting through the Denver Fire Department. See General Conditions
references to “Hot Work Permits”.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
A. Steel Pipe:
1. Steel Pipe, NPS 2 and Smaller: ASTM A 53, Type S (seamless) or Type F (furnace-butt welded), Grade A,
Schedule 40, black steel, plain ends.
2. Steel Pipe, NPS 2-1/2 through NPS 12: ASTM A 53, Type E (electric-resistance welded), Grade A,
Schedule 40, black steel, plain ends.
3. Steel Pipe, NPS 14 through NPS 18: ASTM A 53, Type E (electric-resistance welded) or Type S
(seamless), Grade B, Schedule 30, black steel, plain ends.
4. Steel Pipe Nipples: ASTM A 733, made of ASTM A 53, Schedule 40, black steel; seamless for NPS 2 and
smaller and electric-resistance welded for NPS 2-1/2 and larger.
5. Coordinate flange class with products in other parts of this Section and in related Sections to correlate face
size and bolt patterns.
6. Cast-Iron Threaded Fittings: ASME B16.4; Classes 125 and 250.
7. Malleable-Iron Threaded Fittings: ASME B16.3, Classes 150 and 300.
8. Malleable-Iron Unions: ASME B16.39; Classes 150, 250, and 300.
9. Cast-Iron Pipe Flanges and Flanged Fittings: ASME B16.1, Classes 25, 125, and 250; raised ground face,
and bolt holes spot faced.
10. Wrought-Steel Fittings: ASTM A 234/A 234M, wall thickness to match adjoining pipe.
Denver Public Schools – Facility Management 23 21 13 Hydronic Piping

11. Flanges and fittings below are available in several classes, materials, facings, and end connections.
Coordinate with Project requirements.
12. Wrought cast and forged steel flanges and flanged fittings: ASME B16.5, including bolts, nuts, and gaskets
of the following material group, end connections, and facings:
a) Material Group: 1.1.
b) End connections: butt welding.
c) Facings: raised face.
13. Flexible connectors: stainless-steel bellows with woven, flexible, bronze, wire-reinforcing protective
jacket; 150-psig minimum working pressure and 250 F maximum operating temperature. Flexible
connectors shall not be used for to correct mis-alignmement.
14. Packed, slip, expansion joints: 150-psig minimum working pressure, steel pipe fitting consisting of
telescoping body and slip-pipe sections, packing ring, packing, limit rods, flanged ends, and chrome-plated
finish on slip-pipe telescoping section.
15. Welding Materials: Comply with Section II, Part C, of the ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code for
welding materials appropriate for wall thickness and for chemical analysis of pipe being welded.
16. Gasket Material: Thickness, material, and type suitable for fluid to be handled; and design temperatures
and pressures.
B. Copper Tube:
1. For NPS 3 and smaller: Piping shall be drawn-tempered Type L copper tube (ASTM B88).
2. Fittings shall be wrought copper (ASME B16.22).
3. Unions shall be wrought copper (ASME B16.22).
4. Solder for fittings with antimony-free and lead-free solder with shear strength not less than 7,250 PSI.
Allstate "Aquasafe" or equal.
a) NPS 1-1/2 and smaller: Solder filler materials shall be ASTM B32, 95-5 tin antimony.
b) NPS 2 and larger: Solder brazing materials shall be AWS A5.8, Classification BAg-1 (silver).
2.02 RELIEF VALVES
1. Kunkle
2. Lonegren
3. Lunkenheimer
4. McDonnell and Miller
5. Watts
B. Materials:
1. Bronze body, Teflon seat, stainless steel stem and springs, automatic, direct pressure actuated, capacities
ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code IV certified and labeled.
2.03 [DIAPHRAGM] [BLADDER]-TYPE COMPRESSION TANKS
1. Amtrol
2. American Tube and Controls
3. Bell and Gossett
4. John Wood Co.
5. Taco
B. Materials:

1. Welded carbon steel, rated for 125-psig working pressure and 375 F maximum operating temperature.
2. Separate air charge from system water to maintain design expansion capacity by a flexible [diaphragm]
[bladder] securely sealed into tank. Include drain fitting and taps for pressure gauge and air-charging
fitting.
3. Support vertical tanks with steel legs or base; support horizontal tanks with steel saddles.
4. Factory fabricate and test tank with taps and supports installed and labeled according to the ASME Boiler
and Pressure Vessel Code, Section VIII, Division 1.
2.04 AIR SEPARATORS
1. Amtrol
2. Armstrong
3. Adamson
4. Bell and Gossett
5. John Wood Co.
6. Taco
B. Materials:
1. Tangential-type air separators: Welded black steel; ASME constructed and labeled for 125-psig minimum
working pressure and 375F maximum operating temperature; perforated stainless-steel air collector tube
designed to direct released air into expansion tank; tangential inlet and outlet connections; threaded
connections for NPS 2 and smaller; flanged connections for NPS 2-1/2 and larger; threaded blow-down
connection. Provide units in sizes for full-system flow capacity.
2. In-Line Air Separators: One-piece cast iron with an integral weir designed to decelerate system flow to
maximize air separation at a working pressure up to 175 psig and liquid temperature up to 300 F.
3. Air Purgers: Cast-iron body with internal baffles that slow the water velocity to separate the air from
solution and divert it to the vent for quick removal. Maximum working pressure of 150 psig and
temperature of 250 F.
2.05 STRAINERS
1. Armstrong
2. AW Cash
3. Boylston
4. Hoffman
5. ITT
6. Keckley
7. Mueller
8. Plenty
B. Materials:
1. Basket Strainers: duplex, quick-opening covers, stainless steel baskets, single-handle or hand-wheel
operation of valve. 125-psig working pressure; high-tensile cast-iron body (ASTM A 126, Class B),
flanged-end connections, bolted cover, perforated stainless-steel basket, and bottom drain connection.
2. Y-Pattern Strainers: 125-psig working pressure; cast-iron body (ASTM A 126, Class B), flanged ends for
NPS 2-1/2 and larger, threaded connections for NPS 2 and smaller, bolted cover, perforated stainless-steel
basket, and bottom drain connection.
2.06 PUMP SUCTION FITTINGS

1. Armstrong
2. Bell and Gossett
B. Materials:
1. Fitting to match specified pump. Angle or straight pattern, 175-psig pressure rating, cast-iron body and end
cap, pump-inlet fitting; with bronze startup and bronze or stainless-steel permanent strainers; bronze or
stainless-steel straightening vanes; drain plug; and factory- or field-fabricated support.
2.07 COMBINATION PUMP DISCHARGE VALVES
1. Armstrong
2. Bell and Gossett.
B. Materials:
1. Angle or straight pattern, 175-psig pressure rating, cast-iron body, pump-discharge fitting; with drain plug
and bronze-fitted shutoff, balancing, and check valve features.
2.08 DIFFERENTIAL PRESSURE SWITCHES
1. McDonnell and Miller
2. Mueller
3. Barksdale
2.09 FLOW MEASURING AND BALANCING DEVICES
1. Manual balancing:
a) Armstrong (Tour & Anderson)
b) Barco
c) Bell and Gossett “Circuit Setters”
d) Flow Design “Flowset”
e) Gerand
f) Keystone
B. Materials:
1. Calibrated balancing valves, NPS 2 and smaller: bronze body, ball type, 125-psig working pressure, 250F
maximum operating temperature, and having threaded ends. Valves shall have calibrated orifice or venturi,
connections for portable differential pressure meter with integral seals, and be equipped with a memory stop
to retain set position.
2. Calibrated balancing valves, NPS 2-1/2 and larger: Cast-iron or steel body, ball type, 125-psig working
pressure, 250F maximum operating temperature, and having flanged or grooved connections. Valves shall
have calibrated orifice or venturi, connections for portable differential pressure meter with integral seals,
and be equipped with a memory stop to retain set position.
3. Manual balancing valves: refer to Division 21-23 for requirements of manual balancing valves.
2.10 INHIBITED GLYCOL
1. The Dow Chemical Company
2. Texaco

3. Lyondell
4. Calcium Controls
B. Product: Inhibilted Propylene Glycol (Pure Virgin)
C. Closed-Loop, Water Piping Chemicals: sequestering agent to reduce deposits and adjust pH, corrosion
inhibitors, and conductivity enhancers.
D. Heating Steam and Condensate Piping Chemicals: sequestering agent to reduce hardness and prevent feedline
congestion and to provide alkalinity, oxygen scavenger, carbon-dioxide neutralizer, and filming amines.
E. Open-Loop, Condenser Water Piping Chemicals: sequestering agent to inhibit scaling, acid to reduce alkalinity
and pH, corrosion inhibitor, and biocide.
F. Provide the following system glycol concentrations:
1. Chilled water system 30 percent
2. Hot water system 30 percent
3. All other heat transfer systems 30 percent
G. The manual fill system fill shall be performed by means of a temporary fill tank totally isolated from domestic
water system. Fill connection shall be a female hose-end ball valve. Supply shall be with a removable hose
which can be connected to a male hose-end valve connected to a backflow prevention device.
H. Temperature gauges across coils and pressure gauges across pumps are required. P&T taps are not sufficient.
I. Specify that test and balance ports in chilled-water systems be long enough to extend beyond insulation.
Cutting-back the insulation or covering the ports is not acceptable.
J. Specify side stream filtration, either cartridge (25 micron) or cyclone style be installed in all hydronic systems.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 PIPING INSTALLATION
A. Do not install piping underground or under floor slabs. Below grade lines shall only be permitted outside of the
building as necessary.
B. Hot and Chilled Water, NPS 2 and smaller: aboveground, use Type L (Type B) drawn-temper copper tubing
with soldered joints or Schedule 40 steel pipe with threaded joints.
C. Hot and Chilled Water, NPS 2-1/2 and larger: Schedule 40 steel pipe with welded and flanged joints.
D. Condenser Water: NPS 2 and smaller: aboveground, use Type L (Type B) drawn-temper copper tubing with
soldered joints or Schedule 40 steel pipe with threaded joints.
E. Condenser Water: schedule 40 steel pipe with welded and flanged joints.
F. Condensate Drain Lines: Type L (Type B) drawn-temper copper tubing with soldered joints.
G. Specify unions or flanges downstream of valves and at equipment and apparatus connections.
H. Specify manual air vents at all changes in elevation downward in direction of flow with full size air chamber and
pipe down to accessible location with ¼-inch copper tubing to a petcock.
I. Refer to Division 23 for basic piping installation requirements.
J. Install groups of pipes parallel to each other, spaced to permit applying insulation and servicing of valves.
K. Install drains, consisting of a tee fitting, NPS 3/4 ball valve, and short NPS 3/4 threaded nipple with cap at low
points in piping, system mains, shutoff vavles, bases of vertical risers, equipment, and elsewhere as required for
system drainage.
L. Reduce pipe sizes using eccentric reducer fitting installed with level side up.
M. Unless otherwise indicated, install branch connections to mains using tee fittings in main pipe, with the takeoff
coming out the top of the main pipe.

N. Install strainers on supply side (upstream) of each control valve, pressure-reducing valve, solenoid valve, in-line
pump, and elsewhere as indicated. Install NPS 3/4 nipple and ball valve in blow-down connection of strainers
NPS 2 and larger. Match size of strainer blow-off connection for strainers smaller than NPS 2.
O. Anchor piping for proper direction of expansion and contraction.
P. Provide isolation valves at all branch lines and equipment including coils, air vents, and all other hydronic
equipment.. Provide access to all branch line isolation valves and valves to equipment. Coordinate locations of
access panels with general contractor.
Q. Provide flow measuring and balancing device combinations of orifices, venturis, throttling valves and
temperature and pressure taps to provide accurate flow measurement for manual balancing of hydronic systems.
3.02 VALVE INSTALLATION
A. Refer to Division 21-23 for additional requirements.
3.03 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS
A. Hanger, support, and anchor devices are specified in Division 23. Comply with requirements below for
maximum spacing of supports.
B. Install the following pipe attachments:
1. Adjustable steel clevis hangers for individual horizontal piping less than 20 feet long.
2. NPS 3 and larger: Adjustable roller hangers and spring hangers for individual horizontal piping 20 feet or
longer.
3. Spring hangers to support vertical runs.
4. Verify actual supported loads for hanger sizes and spacing. Consult structural engineer if required to
support piping. Spacing and sizes below are from the 2000 ASHRAE HANDBOOK--"HVAC Systems and
Equipment."
C. Install hangers for steel piping with the following maximum spacing and minimum rod sizes:
1. NPS 3/4: Maximum span, 7 feet; minimum rod size, 1/4 inch.
2. NPS 1 : Maximum span, 7 feet; minimum rod size, 1/4 inch.
3. NPS 1-1/2: Maximum span, 9 feet; minimum rod size, 3/8 inch.
4. NPS 2: Maximum span, 10 feet; minimum rod size, 3/8 inch.
8. NPS 6: Maximum span, 17 feet minimum rod size, 1/2 inch.
D. Install hangers for drawn-temper copper piping with the following maximum spacing and minimum rod sizes:
1. NPS 3/4: Maximum span, 5 feet; minimum rod size, 1/4 inch.
E. Support vertical runs at roof, at each floor, and at 10-foot intervals between floors.

3.04 PIPE JOINT CONSTRUCTION
A. Refer to Division 23 for joint construction requirements for soldered and brazed joints in copper tubing;
threaded, welded, and flanged joints in steel piping.
3.05 HYDRONIC SPECIALTIES INSTALLATION
A. Install manual air vents at high points in piping, at heat-transfer coils, and elsewhere as required for system air
venting. Install air vents with isolation valves between vent and hydronic main or branch.
B. Install automatic air vents in mechanical equipment rooms only at high points of system piping, at heat-transfer
coils, and elsewhere as required for system air venting.
C. Install dip-tube fittings in boiler outlet. Install piping to expansion tank with a 2 percent upward slope toward
tank. Connect boiler-outlet piping.
D. Install in-line air separators in pump suction lines. Install drain valve on units NPS 2 and larger.
E. For vertical expansion tanks: install expansion tanks on floor. Vent and purge air from hydronic system, and
ensure tank is properly charged with air to suit system design requirements.
3.06 TERMINAL EQUIPMENT CONNECTIONS
A. Size for supply and return piping connections shall be same as for equipment connections.
B. Install control valves in accessible locations close to connected equipment.
C. Install bypass piping with globe valve around control valve on heat exhangers. If multiple, parallel control
valves are installed, only one bypass is required.
D. Install ports for pressure and temperature gages at coil inlet connections.
E. Provide isolation valves at all equipment connections. Refer to Division 23 for additional requirements.
3.07 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Mechanical contractor shall obtain approval in writing from Balancing Contractor for all balancing devices.
B. Prepare hydronic piping according to ASME B31.9 and as follows:
1. Leave joints, including welds, uninsulated and exposed for examination during test.
2. Provide temporary restraints for expansion joints that cannot sustain reactions due to test pressure. If
temporary restraints are impractical, isolate expansion joints from testing.
3. Flush system with clean water. Clean strainers.
4. Isolate equipment from piping. If a valve is used to isolate equipment, its closure shall be capable of
sealing against test pressure without damage to valve. Install blinds in flanged joints to isolate equipment.
5. Install safety valve, set at a pressure no more than one-third higher than test pressure, to protect against
damage by expanding liquid or other source of overpressure during test.
C. Perform the following tests on hydronic piping:
1. Use ambient temperature water as a testing medium unless there is risk of damage due to freezing. Another
liquid that is safe for workers and compatible with piping may be used.
2. While filling system, use vents installed at high points of system to release trapped air. Use drains installed
at low points for complete draining of liquid.
3. For initial fill of glycol systems, meter volume to determine correct mix for specified concentration.
Include system volume in report.
4. Check expansion tanks to determine that they are not air bound and that system is full of water.
5. Subject piping system to hydrostatic test pressure that is not less than 1.5 times the design pressure. Test
pressure shall not exceed maximum pressure for any vessel, pump, valve, or other component in system
under test. Verify that stress due to pressure at bottom of vertical runs does not exceed either 90 percent of
specified minimum yield strength or 1.7 times "SE" value in Appendix A of ASME B31.9, "Building
Services Piping."

6. After hydrostatic test pressure has been applied for at least 10 minutes, examine piping, joints, and
connections for leakage. Eliminate leaks by tightening, repairing, or replacing components, and repeat
hydrostatic test until there are no leaks.
7. Prepare written report of testing. Testing report shall be submitted to DPS for approval.
D. Water Analysis: submit a copy of the water analysis to illustrate water quality available at Project site. Refer to
Specification Section 23 25 00 HVAC Water Treatment for additional requirements.
3.08 ADJUSTING
A. Mark calibrated nameplates of pump discharge valves after hydronic system balancing has been completed, to
permanently indicate final balanced position.
B. Perform these adjustments before operating the system:
1. Open valves to fully open position. Close coil bypass valves.
2. Check pump for proper direction of rotation.
3. Set automatic fill valves for required system pressure.
4. Check air vents at high points of system and determine if all are installed and operating freely (automatic
type), or bleed air completely (manual type).
5. Set temperature controls so all coils are calling for full flow.
6. Check operation of automatic bypass valves.
7. Check and set operating temperatures of boilers, chillers, and cooling towers to design requirements.
8. Lubricate motors and bearings.
C. Submit written documentation to DPS that the pump adjustments have been made prior to balancing of the
system by the Test and Balance Contractor.

SECTION 23 21 13.33
GEOTHERMAL ENERGY
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 DESIGN GUIDELINES
A. Provide a closed-loop geothermal system (open loop is not allowed)
B. System is to be designed by a CGD as indicated above. Designer needs to have a minimum of 5 years of
experience designing geothermal mechanical systems, and provide references and project lists (including square
footage, tonnage, well field counts, costs, building type, etc.)
C. System is to be designed in zones, not one large continuous system. Ideal zones would need to consider the use
of the building (example: after hour areas such as gyms / cafeterias should be separate from classroom wings).
Zones are to be treated as an individual system, with individual pumps, purge ports, etc. In the event that one
zone goes down, this should have no impact on the other zones operation. Each zone should have gauges /
purge ports that provide shut off valves as well as pressure gauges that constantly indicate loop pressure.
D. WSHP units can be either vertical or horizontal, but must be coordinated and designed to meet the minimal
manufacturer’s clearances. Manufacturer’s clearances are the minimal, ideal clearance would be approximately
30”. Designer is to thoroughly coordinate with the A/E team to ensure that clearances are free of the following:
1. Walls
2. Bulkheads
3. Casework below
4. Plumbing piping
5. Fire Sprinkler piping
6. Electrical gear / piping
7. Anything permanent that would prevent the maintenance team from accessing the unit
E. ALL WSHP’s located above a ceiling MUST be located above a lay-in ceiling – ABSOLUTELY NO
DRYWALL or hard lids, including bulkheads.
F. WSHP Unit locations must be planned for the future, and at some point these units will have to be lowered and
replaced. Therefore there is to be nothing below these units that prevents this (fire sprinkler pipe, conduit,
bulkhead, etc.). Items that are easily moved are acceptable below the units (such as lay-in ceiling, light fixtures
with whips, etc), but anything that will involve shutting down a system, cutting out drywall, cutting pipe, etc. are
NOT allowed below any WSHP.
G. Any Vertical WSHP’s in mechanical rooms again need to be planned for future removal including doors,
pathways, etc. Please design /coordinate accordingly and enforce during construction.
H. Provide in the specifications a very specific system of purging / flushing of both the wellfields and the interior
piping. Each supply and return line is to flush/purge water in both the forward and reverse direction per
IGSHPA standards. Purging is to follow the IGSHPA closed-loop installation guide. Wellfields need to include
some kind of warning tape around the wellfield and a detection process for locating the wells in the future.
Likewise provide warning tape for all horizontal manifold lines between the wellfield and the building.
I. Ideal Wellfield locations are in open field spaces, parking lots / pavement are not ideal but will be allowed
pending the circumstances of the project and limitations of the site. Locations must be discussed with DPS PM
during design.
1.02 SUBMITTALS / RECORD DRAWINGS
A. Product Data:
1. Component and accessories list.
Denver Public Schools – Facility Management 23 21 13.33 Geothermal Energy

2. Ratings and nameplate information.
3. Water Source Heat Pump Units
4. HDPE pipe, fittings,etc.
5. Installer Certifications
6. Purge Port assembly parts / details
7. Loop Pumps
8. Etc.
B. Quality Assurance Data:
1. All units shall be provided by the same manfacturer.
2. Manufacturer test data for individual units inidcating ratings, performance limits, etc.
C. Project Record Documents:
1. Shop Drawings:
a) Detailed Shop drawings that accurately indicate WSHP size and clearances. Clearances shall be
coordinated and free of all piping, conduit, bulkheads, etc. that will prevent clear access.
b) Well field layouts indicated the following minimum items:
i) Boring locations.
ii) Dimensions between bores and wellfields.
iii) Size of piping.
iv) Pipe routing and arrows indicating supply vs. return.
v) Record Drawings are to include GPS locations of the 4 corners of each wellfield.
vi) Record Drawings are to include all horizontal paths leading to the building, including depths of
piping.
c) Interior Piping – similar to item (b) above, indicate sizes and direction, purge port locations, and which
well field serves which zone.
A. Manufacturer: company specializing in geo-thermal equipment with minimum of five (5) years’ experience.
B. Installation: Contractor shall be required to submit a list of references of successful contracts showing at least
Five (5) years’ experience installing ground source heat pump systems. This includes all installers, from well
driller, piping installer, HVAC contractor, etc. Any contractor directly working on the system needs to have
prior experience.
1.04 WARRANTIES
A. Heat Pumps:
1. Provide written warranty signed by manufacturer, agreeing to replace/repair defective units where materials
or workmanship failures have resulted.
2. Product warranty period shall be for a period of five (5) years from date of substantial completion.
B. HDPE Piping:
1. Provide manufacturer’s 20-year warranty on high-density,polyethylene (HDPE) piping, at all locations both
interior and exterior (Vertical, lateral, main & branch piping)
2. Provide a 5 year warranty on the install free of defects (does not include user damage)

PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 PIPING
A. HDPE (High Density Polyethylene) piping is the preferred pipe to be used both in the fields as well as the
interior piping.
B. Installation to follow IGSHPA guidelines from hangers, to fittings, etc.
C. All fittings are to be Thermal Butt Fusion. Electro-fusion fittings are not acceptable.
D. Acceptable Manufacturers:
1. Centennial
2. US Poly
3. Viega
4. Central + GF + George Fisher
5. Performance Pipe DriscoPlex 5300 Climate Guard
2.02 WATER SOURCE HEAT PUMPS
1. Enconar
2. Florida Heat Pump, Inc.
B. Factory-assembled and tested, packaged ground-source heat pumps consisting of cabinet, sealed refrigerant
circuit including compressor, refrigerant to water heat exchanger, refrigerant to air heat exchanger, and reversing
valve; evaporator fans, refrigeration and temperature controls; filters; damper and isolation valves to allow
servicing of components in refrigeration curcuit.
C. Cabinet:
1. Provide fiberglass insulation inside casing.
2. Provide compartments such that the compressor, reversing valve and water coils are out of the air stream.
D. Evaporator Fans: direct-driven, centrifugal fan with motor and variable speed.
E. Refrigerant-to-Water Heat Exchanger: co-axial heat exchanger with inner copper water tube and outer steel
refrigerant tube.
F. Refrigerant-to- Air Heat Exchanger: copper tube with aluminum fins.
G. Reversing Vavle: standard control valve. Fail-Safe in the heating position.
H. Refrigerant Control: electronic thermostatic expansion valve.
I. Compressor:
1. Hermetic high-efficiency scroll compressor with vibration isolation located in an acoustical treated cabinet.
2. Provide the following safeties: high temperature cut-out, low temperature cut-out, anti-short cycling
compreseeor protection.
J. Unit Controls:
1. Field-installed, single stage, manual change-over thermostat with cool/off/heat switch, on/off fan switch,
and no deadband.
2. Provide two factory mounted and wired relays to facilitate interface with DDC.
3. Factory-wired control panel in accordance with NEC.
4. Connect to Integrated Building Automation System. Refer to Section 23 50 00 - Intelligent Building
Automation System (IBAS) for interface requirements.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION

A. Install ground source heat pumps according to manufacturer’s written instructions.
B. Install units level and plumb, firmly anchored in locations indicated, and maintain manufacturer’s recommended
clearances.
C. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to perform start-up services.
END OF SECTION 23 21 13.33

SECTION 23 21 23
HYDRONIC PUMPS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data:
1. Pumps
B. Shop Drawings:
1. Product Data: Include certified performance curves and rated capacities; shipping, installed, and operating
weights; furnished specialties; final impeller dimensions; and accessories for each type of product indicated.
Indicate pump's operating point on curves. If parallel pumping is used, provide parallel pump operating
curve data.
2. Show pump layout and connections. Include Setting Drawings with templates for installing foundation and
anchor bolts and other anchorages.
3. Prefabricated Pieces.
1. Operating and maintenance procedures.
A. UL Compliance: Fabricate and label pumps to comply with UL 778, "Motor-Operated Water Pumps," for
construction requirements.
B. Product Options: drawings indicate size, profiles, connections, and dimensional requirements of pumps and are
based on the specific types and models indicated. Other manufacturers’ pumps with equal performance
characteristics may be considered. Refer to Division 1 Section "Substitutions."
C. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, Article 100, by a
testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.
1.03 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Manufacturer's Preparation for Shipping: Clean flanges and exposed machined metal surfaces and treat with
anticorrosion compound after assembly and testing. Protect flanges, pipe openings, and nozzles with wooden
flange covers or with screwed-in plugs.
B. Store pumps in dry location.
C. Retain protective covers for flanges and protective coatings during storage.
D. Protect bearings and couplings against damage from sand, grit, and other foreign matter.
E. Comply with pump manufacturer's written rigging instructions.
1.04 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate size and location of concrete bases. Cast anchor-bolt inserts into bases. Concrete, reinforcement,
and formwork requirements are specified in Division 3 Section Cast-in-Place Concrete.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 BASE-MOUNTED PUMPS
1. Armstrong
2. Bell and Gossett
B. General Pump Requirements:
Denver Public Schools – Facility Management 23 21 23 Hydronic Pumps

1. Pump Units: Factory assembled and tested.
2. Motors: Include built-in, thermal-overload protection and grease-lubricated ball bearings. Select each
motor to be non-overloading over full range of pump performance curve. If variable speed drives are used,
provide inverter duty motors.
3. Motors Indicated to Be Energy Efficient: minimum efficiency as indicated according to IEEE 112, Test
Method B. Include motors with higher efficiency than "average standard industry motors" according to
IEEE 112, Test Method B, if efficiency is not indicated.
C. Flexible-Coupled, End-Suction Pumps:
1. Description: base-mounted, centrifugal, flexible-coupled, end-suction, single-stage, bronze-fitted, back-
pull-out, radially split case design; rated for 175-psig minimum working pressure and a continuous water
temperature of 225 deg F.
a) Casing: cast iron, with flanged piping connections, drain plug at low point of volute, threaded gage
tappings at inlet and outlet connections, and integral feet or other means on volute to support weight of
casing and attached piping. Casing shall allow removal and replacement of impeller without
disconnecting piping.
b) Provide vent and drain plugs and pressure gauge tappings on pump casings.
c) Impeller: ASTM B 584, cast bronze, statically and dynamically balanced, closed, overhung, single
suction, keyed to shaft, and secured by locking cap screw.
d) Wear Rings: replaceable, bronze casing ring.
e) Shaft and Sleeve: steel shaft with bronze sleeve.
f) Seals: mechanical, with carbon-steel rotating ring, stainless-steel spring, ceramic seat, and flexible
bellows and gasket.
g) Seals: stuffing box, with at least four rings of graphite-impregnated braided yarn with bronze lantern
ring between center two graphite rings, and bronze packing gland.
h) Coupling: flexible, capable of absorbing torsional vibration and shaft misalignment.
i) Coupling Guard: steel, removable, and attached to mounting frame.
j) Mounting Frame: welded-steel frame and cross members, factory fabricated from ASTM A 36/A 36M
channels and angles. Fabricate for mounting pump casing, coupling guard, and motor. Field-drill
motor-mounting holes for field-installed motors.
k) Motor: secured to mounting frame, with adjustable alignment.
l) Provide complete flushing arrangement for mechanical seals and packing.
2.02 HORIZONTAL SPLIT-CASE PUMPS
1. Bell & Gossett.
2. Armstrong.
B. Description: base-mounted, centrifugal, flexible-coupled, double-suction, single-stage, bronze-fitted, axially
split case design; rated for 175-psig minimum working pressure and a continuous water temperature of
225 deg F, with mechanical seals and impeller mounted between bearings.
1. Provide double row outboard ball bearings on horizontal split-case pumps.
2.03 IN-LINE PUMPS
A. Approved Manufacturers:
1. Armstrong
2. Bell and Gossett
3. Wilo

B. Description: Horizontal, in-line, centrifugal, single-stage, bronze-fitted, radially split case design; rated for 125-
psig minimum working pressure and a continuous water temperature of 225 deg F.
2.04 PUMP SPECIALTY FITTINGS
A. Suction Diffuser: angle or straight pattern, 175-psig pressure rating, cast-iron body and end cap, pump-inlet
fitting; with bronze startup and bronze or stainless-steel permanent strainers; bronze or stainless-steel
straightening vanes; drain plug; and factory- or field-fabricated support.
B. Triple-Duty Valve: angle or straight pattern, 175-psig pressure rating, cast-iron body, pump-discharge fitting;
with drain plug and bronze-fitted shutoff, balancing, and check valve features.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION OF PUMPS
A. Install pumps to provide access for periodic maintenance, including removing motors, impellers, couplings, and
accessories.
B. Support pumps and piping separately so piping is not supported by pumps.
C. Suspend in-line pumps using continuous-thread hanger rod and vibration-isolation hangers. Install seismic
bracing as required by authorities having jurisdiction.
D. Set base-mounted pumps on concrete foundation. Disconnect coupling halves before setting. Do not reconnect
couplings until alignment operations have been completed.
1. Support pump baseplate on rectangular metal blocks and shims, or on metal wedges with small taper, at
points near foundation bolts to provide a gap of 3/4 to 1-1/2 inches between pump base and foundation for
grouting.
2. Adjust metal supports or wedges until pump and driver shafts are level. Check coupling faces and suction
and discharge flanges of pump to verify that they are level and plumb.
E. Automatic Condensate Pump Units: Install units for collecting condensate and extend to open drain.
3.02 ALIGNMENT
A. Align pump and motor shafts and piping connections after setting them on foundations, after grout has been set
and foundation bolts have been tightened, and after piping connections have been made.
B. Comply with pump and coupling manufacturers' written instructions.
C. After alignment is correct, tighten foundation bolts evenly but not too firmly. Completely fill baseplate with
nonshrink, nonmetallic grout while metal blocks and shims or wedges are in place. After grout has cured, fully
tighten foundation bolts.
3.03 CONNECTIONS
A. Piping installation requirements are specified in other Division 23 Sections. Drawings indicate general
arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties.
B. Install piping adjacent to machine to allow service and maintenance.
C. Connect piping to pumps. Install valves that are the same size as piping connected to pumps.
D. Install suction and discharge pipe sizes equal to or greater than diameter of pump nozzles.
E. Install check valve and throttling valve on discharge side of in-line circulators.
F. Install suction diffuser and shutoff valve on suction side of base-mounted pumps.
G. Install triple-duty valve on discharge side of base-mounted pumps.
H. Install flexible connectors on suction and discharge sides of base-mounted pumps between pump casing and
valves. Flexible connectors shall not be used to correct for mis-alignment of piping. Provide a spool piece of
pipe in place of the flexible connector to insure proper pipe alignment. Then remove spool and install the
flexible connector. DPS shall inspect and approve the installation of flexible connectors. The contractor shall
provide documentation that the pump is installed in accordance with the manufacturer’s recommended
tolerances. The flexible connection braiding shall not be used to compensate for offsets and alignment of the
piping. The flexible connector shall not be compressed.

I. Install pressure gauges on pump suction and discharge. Install at integral pressure-gauge tappings where
provided.
J. Install check valve and gate or ball valve on each condensate pump unit discharge.
K. Install electrical connections for power, controls, and devices.
L. Electrical power and control wiring and connections are specified in Division 26 Sections.
M. Final close-out procedure: Remove start-up strainer and install permanent strainer.
N. Final close-out procedure: Verify that the pump controls are correct for required application.
3.04 CONNECTIONS
A. Drawings indicate general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties. Refer to Specification Section 23 21
13 Hyrondic Piping for additional requirements.
C. Install shutoff and check valves on inlet of pressure-operated units.
D. Install inlet strainer and valved bypass to drain at system return connection.
E. Install check valve, shutoff valve, and throttling valve at pump discharge connections for each pump unit.
F. Install pipe drain to nearest floor drain for overflow and drain piping connections.
G. Install full-size vent piping, terminating in 180o elbow at point above highest steam system connection or as
indicated.
H. Install electrical connections for power, controls, and devices.
I. Electrical power and control wiring and connections are specified in Division 26 Sections.
3.05 DEMONSTRATION
A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate,
and maintain pumps as specified below:
1. Train owner's maintenance personnel on procedures and schedules for starting and stopping,
troubleshooting, servicing, and maintaining pumps.
2. Schedule training with owner, through architect, with at least seven days' advance notice.

SECTION 23 22 13
STEAM AND CONDENSATE PIPING
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 HOTWORK
A. General Conditions of the Contract: special note should be taken of Permitting requirements and HOTWORK
regulations as identified in Article 4.
1.02 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of special-duty valve and steam trap indicated, including rated capacities and
accessories.
B. Welding Certificates: Copies of certificates for welding procedures and personnel.
C. Maintenance Data: For steam traps, vacuum breakers, and meters to include in maintenance manuals specified
in Division 1.
A. Welding: Qualify processes and operators according to the ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code:
Section IX, "Welding and Brazing Qualifications."
B. ASME Compliance: Comply with ASME B31.9, "Building Services Piping," for materials, products, and
installation. Safety valves and pressure vessels shall bear the appropriate ASME label. Fabricate and stamp
flash tanks to comply with the ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code, Section VIII, Division 1.
1.04 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate layout and installation of steam and condensate piping and suspension system components with other
construction, including light fixtures, hydronic piping, fire-suppression-system components, and partition
assemblies.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
A. Steam:
1. Schedule 40 black steel pipe and cast iron fittings for sizes 2” and smaller, and butt-welded fittings 2-½”
and larger.
2. Direct bury pipe shall not be used for steam applications without the approval of DPS and mechanical
engineer.
B. Condensate:
1. Schedule 80 black steel pipe and extra-heavy cast iron fittings.
2. Direct bury pipe shall not be used for steam applications without the approval of DPS and mechanical
engineer.
2.02 STEAM TRAPS
1. Armstrong.
2. Sarco.
3. Watson McDaniel.
4. ITT McDonnell Hoffman
2.03 PRESSURE-REDUCING VALVES
A. Not Used.
2.04 RELIEF VALVES
Denver Public Schools – Facility Management 23 22 13 Steam and Condensate Piping

A. Acceptable Manufacturer:
1. Kunkle.
2.05 STRAINERS
1. Armstrong
2. Boylston
3. AW Cash
4. Fisher
5. ITT
6. Hoffman
7. Keckley
8. Leslie
9. Mueller/Fabrotech
B. Y-Pattern Strainers: 250-psig working steam pressure; ASTM A 126, Class B cast-iron body; stainless-steel
screen, No. 20 mesh for 2” and smaller and manufacturer's recommended perforations for 2-1/2” and larger;
tapped blowoff plug. Threaded connections for strainers 2” and smaller and flanged connections for strainers 2-
1/2” and larger.
C. Basket Strainers: 250-psig working steam pressure; ASTM A 126, Class B cast-iron body; stainless-steel
screen; bolted cover; threaded connections for strainers 2” and smaller and flanged connections for strainers 2-
1/2” and larger.
2.06 FLANGE GASKETS
A. Acceptable Manufacturers (Non-asbestos only)
1. Flexitallic or DPS approved equivalent.
2.07 RISING-STEM GATE VALVES
1. Stockham
2. Lunkenheimer
3. Powell
4. Jenkins
B. Up to two (2) inches: bronze, rising stem.
C. Over two (2) inches: iron, rising stem.
2.08 HIGH-PERFORMANCE BUTTERFLY VALVES
A. Acceptalbe Manufacturers:
1. Jamesburg
2. Tyco
2.09 VACUUM CONDENSATE UNIT
A. Unit shall be designed for high temperature use.
B. Reciever shall be close grained cast iron for corrosion protection.
C. Duplex bronze fitted pumps.
D. NEMA 2/UL listed control panel.

PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION
A. Prior to any steam system installation work, the installer shall review the installation and the equipment to be
installed with DPS and Mechanical Engineer.
B. Install anti-seize joint compound appropriate for steam applications. No sealants with adhesive, such as Rector-
Seal, will be acceptable.
C. Install drains, consisting of a tee fitting, ¾” ball valve, and short ¾” threaded nipple with cap, at low points in
piping system mains and elsewhere as required for system drainage.
D. Install steam supply piping at a uniform grade of 0.2 percent downward in direction of steam flow.
E. Install condensate return piping at a uniform grade of 0.4 percent downward in direction of condensate flow.
F. Reduce pipe sizes using eccentric reducer fitting installed with level side down.
G. Unless otherwise indicated, install branch connections to steam mains using 45-degree fittings in main pipe, with
the takeoff coming out the top of the main pipe. Use of 90-degree tee fittings is permissible if 45-degree fittings
are impractical. If length of branch takeoff is less than 10 feet, pitch branch line down toward mains at a 0.4
percent grade.
H. Provide unions in piping 2” and smaller adjacent to each valve, at final connections of each piece of equipment,
and elsewhere as indicated.
I. Provide flanges in piping 2-1/2” and larger at final connections of each piece of equipment and elsewhere as
indicated.
J. Provide strainers on supply side of each control valve, pressure-reducing valve, solenoid valve, traps, and
elsewhere as indicated. Install ¾” nipple and ball valve in blowdown connection of strainers 2” and larger.
Match size of strainer blowoff connection for strainers smaller than 2”.
K. Install anchors on the piping for proper direction of expansion and contraction.
L. Install drip legs at low points and natural drainage points such as ends of mains, bottoms of risers, and ahead of
pressure regulators, control valves, isolation valves, pipe bends, and expansion joints.
1. On straight runs with no natural drainage points, install drip legs at intervals not exceeding 300 feet where
pipe is pitched down in direction of steam flow and a maximum of 150 feet where pipe is pitched up in
direction of steam flow.
2. Reduce distances above by about half in systems warmed up automatically.
3. Specify gate valve at drip legs, dirt pockets, and strainer blowdowns to allow removal of dirt and scale.
4. Specify that steam traps close to drip legs and equipment. Show steam traps in accessible locations.
M. Hanger, support, and anchor devices are specified in Division 23..
N. Terminal Equipment Connections:
1. Size for supply and return piping connections shall be same as for equipment connections.
2. Specify traps and control valves in accessible locations close to connected equipment.
3. For heat exhangers, specify bypass piping with globe valve around control valve. If multiple, parallel
control valves are installed, only one bypass is required.
4. For heat exchangers, specify vacuum breaker downstream from control valve and bypass and close to coil
inlet connection.
5. Specify ports for pressure and temperature gauges at coil inlet connections.
6. Specify a drip leg at coil outlet.
O. Vacuum breakers:
1. Required at all heat exchanger equipment and absorption chillers with automatic temperature control valves.
Use ball-type, similar to Spirax-Sarco VB14 and VB21.

P. Steam traps:
1. End of main drips: bucket type.
2. Terminal equipment (except for radiators and convectors): float and thermostatic.
3. Radiators and convectors with cooling legs: thermostatic.
4. Contract Documents shall indicate sizing parameters for traps.
5. Drawing detail shall indicate, in the direction of condensate flow: ball valve, strainer with drain valve,
union, trap, union, test-tee with ball valve, spring-loaded check valve and ball valve.
Q. Valves:
1. High-performance butterfly valves are preferred over rising-stem gate valves where possible. High-
temperature ball valves are preferred for condensate lines.
2. Gate valves shall be rising-stem, installed with stems upright if possible, and no lower than horizontal.

SECTION 23 22 23
STEAM CONDENSATE PUMPS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data:
1. Pumps
B. Shop Drawings:
Indicate pump's operating point on curves. If parallel pumping is used, provide parallel pump operating
curve data.
2. Show pump layout and connections. Include Setting Drawings with templates for installing foundation and
anchor bolts and other anchorages.
3. Prefabricated Pieces
A. UL Compliance: Fabricate and label pumps to comply with UL 778, "Motor-Operated Water Pumps," for
construction requirements.
based on the specific types and models indicated. Other manufacturers’ pumps with equal performance
C. Regulatory Requirements: Fabricate and test steam condensate pumps to comply with HI 1.1-1.5, "Centrifugal
Pumps for Nomenclature, Definitions, Application and Operation," and HI 1.6, "Centrifugal Pump Tests."
D. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, Article 100, by a
testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.
B. Store pumps in dry location.
E. Comply with pump manufacturer's written rigging instructions.
1.04 COORDINATION
and formwork requirements are specified in Division 3 Section Cast-in-Place Concrete.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 STEAM CONDENSATE RETURN PUMPS/RECEIVERS (ELECTRIC)
A. Approved Manufacturers:
1. Hoffman. ITT Fluid Handling; Div. of ITT Fluid Technology Corp.
2. Fab Tek
Denver Public Schools – Facility Management 23 22 23 Steam Condensate Pumps

B. Description: factory-fabricated, packaged, electric-drive pump units; with receiver, pumps, controls, and
accessories suitable for operation with low-pressure steam condensate.
C. Configuration: floor-mounting, duplex unit with receiver and float switches.
1. Control Circuits: independent of each pump with electrical alternator to operate pumps in sequence and
allow both pumps to operate on receiver high level.
2. Manual Lead-Lag Control: overrides electrical alternator when active pump is manually selected and
allows both pumps to operate on receiver high level.
2.02 STEAM CONDENSATE RETURN PUMPS/RECEIVERS (STEAM OR AIR)
1. Watson-McDaniel
2. Yarway
3. Armstrong
B. Description: factory-fabricated, pressure-powered pump units with body and receivers constructed of cast iron
or welded steel and with controls, valves, piping connections, and accessories suitable for pumping low.
C. Configuration: packaged duplex unit with float-operated valve control and receiver.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION OF PUMPS
A. Install pumps to provide access for periodic maintenance, including removing motors, impellers, couplings, and
accessories.
B. Support pumps and piping separately so piping is not supported by pumps.
C. Suspend in-line pumps using continuous-thread hanger rod and vibration-isolation hangers. Install seismic
bracing as required by authorities having jurisdiction.
D. Set base-mounted pumps on concrete foundation. Disconnect coupling halves before setting. Do not reconnect
couplings until alignment operations have been completed.
1. Support pump baseplate on rectangular metal blocks and shims, or on metal wedges with small taper, at
points near foundation bolts to provide a gap of 3/4 to 1-1/2 inches between pump base and foundation for
grouting.
2. Adjust metal supports or wedges until pump and driver shafts are level. Check coupling faces and suction
and discharge flanges of pump to verify that they are level and plumb.
E. Automatic Condensate Pump Units: Install units for collecting condensate and extend to open drain.
3.02 ALIGNMENT
A. Align pump and motor shafts and piping connections after setting them on foundations, after grout has been set
and foundation bolts have been tightened, and after piping connections have been made.
B. Comply with pump and coupling manufacturers' written instructions.
C. After alignment is correct, tighten foundation bolts evenly but not too firmly. Completely fill baseplate with
nonshrink, nonmetallic grout while metal blocks and shims or wedges are in place. After grout has cured, fully
tighten foundation bolts.
3.03 CONNECTIONS
B. Connect piping to pumps. Install valves that are the same size as piping connected to pumps.
C. Install suction and discharge pipe sizes equal to or greater than diameter of pump nozzles.
D. Install check valve and throttling valve on discharge side of in-line circulators.
E. Install suction diffuser and shutoff valve on suction side of base-mounted pumps.

F. Install triple-duty valve on discharge side of base-mounted pumps.
G. Install pressure gauges on pump suction and discharge. Install at integral pressure-gauge tappings where
provided.
H. Install check valve and gate or ball valve on each condensate pump unit discharge.
I. Install electrical connections for power, controls, and devices.
J. Electrical power and control wiring and connections are specified in Division 26 Sections.
K. Final close-out procedure: Remove start-up strainer and install permanent strainer.
L. Final close-out procedure: Verify that the pump controls are correct for required application.
3.04 STEAM CONDENSATE PUMP INSTALLATION
A. Install pumps according to manufacturer's written instructions.
B. Install pumps to provide access for periodic maintenance, including removing motors, impellers, couplings, and
accessories.
C. Support pumps and piping separately so piping is not supported by pumps.
D. Install pumps on concrete bases. Anchor pumps to bases using inserts or anchor bolts.
E. Install thermometers and pressure gauges.
3.05 CONNECTIONS
A. Drawings indicate general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties. Refer to Specification Section 23 21
13 Hyrondic Piping for additional requirements.
C. Install shutoff and check valves on inlet of pressure-operated units.
D. Install inlet strainer and valved bypass to drain at system return connection.
E. Install check valve, shutoff valve, and throttling valve at pump discharge connections for each pump unit.
F. Install pipe drain to nearest floor drain for overflow and drain piping connections.
G. Install full-size vent piping, terminating in 180o elbow at point above highest steam system connection or as
indicated.
H. Install electrical connections for power, controls, and devices.
I. Electrical power and control wiring and connections are specified in Division 26 Sections.
3.06 DEMONSTRATION
A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate,
and maintain pumps as specified below:
1. Train owner's maintenance personnel on procedures and schedules for starting and stopping,
troubleshooting, servicing, and maintaining pumps.
2. Schedule training with owner, through architect, with at least seven days' advance notice.

SECTION 23 23 00
REFRIGERANT PIPING
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 HOTWORK
A. General Conditions of the Contract. Special note should be taken of Permitting requirements and HOTWORK
regulations as identified in Article 4.
A. Installer Qualifications: five (5) year minimum installation experience on projects with refrigeration piping
system work similar in scope and nature to that required for the project.
B. Brazing Qualifications: certify operators, brazing procedures and brazers in accordance with ANSI B31.5 for
shop and job-site brazing of refrigerant piping work.
1.03 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of valve and refrigerant piping specialty indicated. Include pressure drop, based
on manufacturer's test data, for thermostatic expansion valves, solenoid valves, and pressure-regulating valves.
B. Welding Certificates: Copies of certificates for welding procedures and personnel.
C. Field Test Reports: Indicate and interpret test results for compliance with performance requirements.
D. Maintenance Data: For refrigerant valves and piping specialties to include in maintenance manuals specified in
Division 1.
1.04 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate layout and installation of refrigerant piping and suspension system components with other
construction, including light fixtures, HVAC equipment, fire-suppression-system components, and partition
assemblies.
B. Coordinate pipe sleeve installations for foundation wall penetrations.
C. Coordinate installation of roof curbs, equipment supports, and roof penetrations.
D. Coordinate pipe sleeve installations for penetrations in exterior walls and floor assemblies.
1.05 EXTRA MATERIALS
A. Furnish extra materials described below that match products installed and that are packaged with protective
covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents.
1. Refrigeration Oil Test Kits: Two each, containing everything required to conduct one test.
2. Refrigerant: Two containers each, with 20 lb (9 kg) of refrigerant.
3. Filter-Dryer Cartridges: Three of each type.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
A. Tubes, Fittings and Joints
1. Tube material
a) Size 3/4" and smaller: hard drawn temper copper tube.
b) Size 3/4" through 4-1/8": hard drawn temper copper tube.
2. Type ACR.
3. Fittings: wrought-copper solder joints, ANSI B16.22.
4. Joints: brazed or soldered with material having shear strength of 10,000 psi or greater.
5. Hangers: unitstrut with insulated clamps
Denver Public Schools – Facility Management 23 23 00 Refrigerant Piping

6. All condensate lines need to be at least 1” pipe
2.02 REFRIGERANT VALVES
A. Globe and Check Valves
1. Acceptable Manufacturers
a) Henry Valve Co.
b) Parker Hannifin Corp.
c) Singer
d) Sporlan Valve Co.
B. Solenoid Valves
1. Acceptable Manufacturers
a) Alco Controls Division, Emerson Electric Co.
b) Automatic Switch Co.
c) Sporlan Valve Co.
C. Refrigeration Accessories
1. Including strainers, moisture-liquid indicators, filter dryers, evaporator pressure regulators, discharge line
mufflers, expansion valves, superheat adjustment.
2. Manufacturers
a) Alco Controls Division, Emerson Electric Co.
b) Henry Valve Co.
c) Parker Hannifin Corp.
d) Sporlan Valve Co.
2.03 COMPRESSORS
A. Specify a five (5)-year extended warranty.
2.04 ACCESSORY EQUIPMENT TO INCLUDE
A. Filter dryer for liquid line of adequate size, replaceable if available.
B. Sight glass moisture indicator installed in the liquid line at a convenient and accessible location.
C. Liquid solenoid valve located near the expansion valve on systems using coil pump-down.
D. Service hand valves shall be required on small and extensive or large refrigerant systems. They shall be located
for component isolation purposes during normal maintenance.
E. Liquid charging port and service valve installed in the liquid line on large systems.
F. Oil separators required if evaporator is below 0oF and located below condensing unit
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION
A. Specify that it is not acceptable to vent to atmosphere when using refrigerant for testing systems.
B. Specify condensate pans that slope toward drain.
C. Install refrigerant piping according to ASHRAE 15.
D. Hanger, support, and anchor products are specified in Division 23.
Denver Public Schools – Facility Management 23 23 00 Refrigerant Piping

SECTION 23 25 00
HVAC WATER TREATMENT
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 GENERAL GUIDELINES
A. Open Cooling Towers: a treatment system utilizing chemicals and biocides that contain no heavy metals and are
non-carconigenic to prevent corrosion, scaling and biological growth.
1. Cooling tower chemicals are NOT supplied by Denver Public Schools.
B. Closed Loop Systems include the following and shall utilize sodium sulfite-based water treatment.
1. Closed Circuit Cooling Towers (also known as Fluid Cooler or Evaporative Condensing Tower).
2. Hot and chilled water systems.
3. Hot and chilled systems shall use propylene glycol to lower system water freezing point. Propylene glycol
is NOT supplied by Denver Public Schools .
C. Steam Systems are designed for 100% condensate return and use a sodium sulfite-based internal boiler
treatment.
D. Direct evaporative cooling systems shall utlize biocide with weekly drain down. Biocide used shall be approved
for contact with humans.
1. Evaporative cooling chemicals are NOT supplied by Denver Public Schools.
E. Indirect evaporative cooling systems shall utlize biocide with weekly drain down. Biocide used shall be
approved for contact with humans.
1. Evaporative cooling chemicals are NOT supplied by Denver Public Schools.
A. System cleaning and initial treatment will be documented by the General Contractor and Project Manager or a
representitave of the Maintenance Department.
B. This documentation shall become a part of the Operation and Maintenance Manual and shall include the
cleaning procedure for each system, personel involved, results of chemical analyses, amount of Propylene
Glycol used for heating or cooling systems and volume for closed loop systems.
1. System cleaning includes piping and equipment.
1.03 SUBMITTALS
A. Project Record Documents:
1. As-built shop drawings:
a) Certified elevation and outline drawings with dimensions.
b) Certified plan view drawings with dimensions.
c) Wiring and termination drawings.
1.04 MAINTENANCE
A. Closed loop and steam systems:
1. Following start up and cleaning Denver Public Schools Maintenance will perform water treatment in house.
B. Open Cooling Towers, replacement cooling towers, and new cooling towers associated with new chillers.
1. Following the project completion the contractor will provide a water treatment service contract for the
duration of the 24 month warentee period.
Denver Public Schools – Facility Management 23 25 00 HVAC Water Treatment

a) Service contract will include monthly maintenance checks and all chemicals needed
b) Records of service performed will be kept on site in a contractor provided maintenance log book.
c) Cooling tower conductivity shall be maintained between 1200 and 1500 micromhos. Actual Set point
to be based on individual laboratory analysis.
d) Scaling inhibitor addition shall be sufficient to curtail scale formation.
e) Biocide injections will alternate weekly
2. All chemicals shall be provided by the Water Treatment Contractor for the duration of the warranty period.
1.05 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
A. Design Requirements: specify the following procedures.
1. Pre-start Cleaning of closed loop HVAC Piping Systems
a) Notify the DPS five working days in advance of the start of cleaning. Cleaning and flushing of all
systems shall take place in the presence of the DPS and or a representative from Maintenance. The
“Certification of Work Certificate” documents the cleaning procedure and personnel involved. The
designated Maintenance Personnel observing the cleaning process shall sign the certification. School
personnel or custodial staff are not authorized to certify the procedure.
b) Closed loop systems, hot and chilled water shall be cleaned using a cold alkaline cleaning solution at
normal system pumping pressures. Use commercially available chemicals furnished by the contractor
(at no additional cost to the Owner)
i) If the contractor furnishes system cleaning chemicals; use the following formula or a functionally
equivalent mixture.
Chemical Ounces per gallons of system volume
trisodium phosphate 16 per 1000
sodium hydroxide 1 per 100
dishwashing detergent (liquid surfactant) 1 per 100
sodium sulfite (oxygen scavenger) 1 per 100
ii) The cleaning solution must begin with a minimum pH of 10.0
iii) Procedure to clean an entire hydronic system:
1 Isolate the expansion tank from all cleaning solutions.
2 Fill the system with water and add the alkaline cleaning solutions.
3 Circulate the alkaline cleaning solution in any hot or chilled water system for 48 hours.
4 Drain the alkaline cleaning solution and fill the system with domestic cold water. Circulate
and flush as necessary until the circulated water reaches a pH of 8.5 or less at all end points
of the hydronic system.
5 When the rinse water reaches 8.5 pH or less, remove and clean all piping strainers through
out the system. Do not drain the rinse water from the piping system until the propylene
glycol is ready to be installed (if applicable). The designated Denver Public Schools
Maintenance person must verify and approve the cleanliness of the system. A minimum of
three samples will be taken of each hydronic system. The contractor and the owner will
each retain one sample and one will be sent for chemical analysis.
6 Drain and partially fill the hydronic system with clean domestic cold water. Install the
uninhibited propylene glycol to a concentration of 30%. The owner will sample and install
the water treatment chemicals into the system – pH buffer, oxygen scavenger, and corrosion
inhibiting surfactant.

Before using the glycol feeder, thoroughly clean the tank of oil, grease and solids. Fill the
7 tank completely with domestic cold water and one gallon of chorine bleach. Allow to stand
over night. Rinse tank free of chorine.
8 Fill the specified propylene glycol mixture
iv) In no case shall the system being cleaned be left in an untreated condition for more than eight
hours.
v) The water treatment contractor shall certify in writing that the system was cleaned and treated in
conformance with the specification.
vi) If freeze protection is specified in the system, it must Pure Virgin Inhibited Propylene Glycol.
Report system volume and glycol/water mixture added.
 Initial (start-up) concentration of propylene glycol shall be 30% for heating water and 30%
for chilled water.
 At the end of the 24 month warrantee glycol concentrations should be at 30%.
2. Boilers (Steam and Heating Water):
a) Boilers shall be cleaned as per manufacturers instructions
b) Notify the DPS five working days in advance of the start of cleaning. Cleaning and flushing of all
systems shall take place in the presence of the DPS and or a representative from Maintenance.
“Certification of Work Certificate” documents the cleaning procedure and personnel involved. The
designated Maintenance Personnel observing the cleaning shall sign the certification. School
personnel or custodial staff are not authorized to certify the procedure.
3. Chemical Feed Equipment:
a) Chemical Pot Feeder
i) Provide bypass type pot feeder with 3/4" NPT connections and a 3-1/2" quick opening cap with
"O" ring seat. Capacity as specified herein rated for 200 psig working pressure at temperatures up
to 240oF.
ii) Feeders shall be two gallon capacity.
4. Glycol Feeder System
a) Provide a glycol feeder system as shown on the drawings. The glycol feeder shall have a 50-gallon
polyethylene tank, with capacity indicator and removable cover. Four legs shall support the tank with
footpads. 3/4" under tank drain with hose bib shall be provided for draining the tank.
i) Provide a separate glycol feed tank for hot water system and a separate glycol feed tank for chilled
water.
b) The pump shall be a positive displacement rotary gear pump with 3/4" suction side ball valve. Rotary
gear pump shall be all bronze construction, 1.8 gpm @ 100 psi, 1725 rpm. Electrical characteristics:
1/3 hp, 120/60/1, 20 amp.
c) Pump discharge shall consist of a 3/4" check valve, 3/4" "T" for connecting the Glycol Feeder system
to the system piping, and a 30-psig relief valve for discharge back into the storage drum.
d) The Control Cabinet shall be mounted on the tank and contain the following functions:
i) One liquid level switch with horn alarm, low-level light, and horn silencer switch. When the
storage tank level is below safe level, the horn alarm and light will activate.
ii) A silencer switch, mounted on the control cabinet, will disconnect the horn, but the low-level light
will remain on until the tank level has reached a safe working level.
iii) A momentary spring-loaded pushbutton switch for testing the operation of the pump.

iv) System Pressure gauge.
v) Pressure switch for pump control. Set at the required system pressure of (as indicated on the
drawings by the designer) psig.
e) Provide one hand-operated rotary gear transfer pump with eight foot of 1" hose and a 3/4" nozzle. The
pump shall have a 1" telescoping suction pipe and bung adapter with 2" thread. The above is for the
operator to transfer glycol from the drum into the glycol feed tank.
5. Cooling Tower Chemical Controler
a) Provide a prefabricated, pre-wired, and pre-piped automatic tower water control system to bleed
solids by conductivity or TDS and feed inhibitor in direct proportion to the makeup water rate of the
cooling tower water system. Automatic alternating control of dual biocides used to eliminate
biofouling shall also be part of this controller.
b) All of the electronic equipment shall be mounted in a NEMA 12 gasketed enclosure hereinafter
referred to as the controller.
i) The enclosure shall incorporate side brackets for mounting and shall have locking hasps. The
enclosure door shall be hinged and shall contain a large LEXAN viewing window.
ii) Manual override switches and LED pilot lamps for the following functions shall be mounted on
the inside panel.
 Power "On-Off"
 Flow "On-Off"
 Bleed Valve "On-Auto-Off"
 Inhibitor Pump "On-Off"
 Biocide A "On-Auto-Off"
 Biocide B "On-Auto-Off"
c) Provide a prefabricated pump/piping rack for wall mounting adjacent to or beneath the controller.
i) The rack shall be board mounted and shall include:
 Bypass piping and flow control and isolation valves
 TDS sensor/flow switch assembly
 Bleed solenoid valve, strainer, and flow control valve. Strainer shall be placed as to protect
the bleed solenoid valve.
 Inhibitor and biocide pumps
 Chemical injection valves installed in bypass piping and pre-piped to respective pumps
 Cord plugs, and receptacles as necessary to connect all pre-mounted devices to the controller.
6. Steam Boilers:
a) Provide a water meter to measure make-up water into the steam boiler system. The water meter shall
be installed just upstream (before) of the makeup water solenoid to the condensate receiver tank.
i) Provide a multi-jet turbine type water meter for installation in the make-up water line. Meter
selection size shall be the responsibility of the water treatment contractor. (See drawings for pipe
size).
ii) Meter body shall be cast bronze, class 150 with NPT couplings.
iii) Meter shall be magnetic drive type with sealed direct reading, five digit register and sweep second
hand for low flow indication.

b) Provide bypass type pot feeder with 3/4" NPT connections and a 3-1/2" quick opening cap with "O"
ring seat for each boiler. Capacity as specified herein rated for 200 psig working pressure at
temperatures up to 240 degree F.
i) Feeders shall be two gallon capacity, located as indicated on the drawings, parallel to the
condensate feed line, mounted with the top no higher than 36" from the floor.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 CHEMICAL FEED PUMPS
1. Advantage – MEGA TRON
B. DDC control connection, coordinate points with controls contractor.
2.02 WATER METERS
A. Acceptable Manufacturers
1. Carlon
2. LMI
3. Pulsafeeder
4. Neptune
5. Hersey
2.03 CONDUCTIVITY METERS
1. LMI
2. Pulsafeeder
3. Advantage
2.04 CHEMICAL FEED EQUIPMENT
1. Vector Industries
2. Neptune
3. Claypool
4. J. L. Wingert
B. Solenoid Valves: Forged-brass body, globe pattern, and general-purpose solenoid enclosure with 120-V,
continuous-duty coil
C. Electronic Timers: 150-second and 5-minute ranges, with infinite adjustment over full range, and mounted in
cabinet with hand-off-auto switches and status lights
D. Chemical Tubing: Schedule 40, PVC with solvent-cement joints; or polypropylene tubing with heat fusion
E. Plastic Ball Valves: Rigid PVC or CPVC body, integral union ends, and polytetrafluoroethylene seats and seals
F. Plastic-Body Strainer: Rigid PVC or CPVC with cleanable stainless-steel strainer element
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION
A. Install treatment equipment level and plumb.
B. Add cleaning chemicals as recommended by manufacturer.

C. Coordinate sub-metering of water at the following locations: cooling tower makeup water, cooling tower bleed
water.
D. All cleaning and disinfecting of piping shall be witnessed by the engineer and the DPS.
E. Provide a minimum of 4 hours of training for DPS maintenance personnel. The training shall take place in four
4-hour sessions and shall include step by step instructions for testing and administring the water treatment
systems.
1. The training shall include job logs for each school/facility where water treatment has been installed. Job
logs shall contain reproducable log pages for maintenance staff use. Log shall also be provided in electonic
format utilizing the latest version of Word or Excel software.
2. Open side of systems: Provide one (1) report per month during operating period.
F. The mechanical contractor shall determine the system volume by the use of a flow meter or volumemetric dye
testing. The volume of each system shall be recorded in the O & M Manual. System volume will be used to
determine the ammount of chemical quantities for the systems.

SECTION 23 31 00
HVAC DUCT AND CASING
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Ductwork
2. Manufactured duct joints
3. Casings
4. Fibrous glass ductwork
5. Damper operator hardware
6. Volume control dampers
7. Fire dampers
8. Combination fire and smoke dampers
9. Smoke dampers
10. Back-draft dampers
11. Uninsulated triple-lock aluminum round ductwork
12. Insulated triple-lock aluminum round ductwork
13. Insulated flexible round ductwork
14. Flexible duct fan connections
15. Access door hardware
16. Duct access doors
A. All ductwork shall be in accordance with NFPA 90A and NFPA 90B. All kitchen exhaust duct shall be in
accordance with NFFPA96 and local building code.
1.03 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data:
1. Ductwork material.
2. Product data sheets for dampers, access doors, flexible duct, hardware, and sealants.
1. Ductwork shop drawings indicating fabrication and installation details for metal ducts shall include the
following:
a) Duct layout indicating size and pressure class.
b) Duct accessories such as dampers, louvers, access doors, and air devices.
c) Indicate duct length, fittings, hangers and supports, and seals.
2. Coordination drawings shall include the following. Coordination drawings may be combined with ducwork
shop drawings.
a) Provide reflected ceiling plans, drawn to scale, which indicate the location of ceiling mounted diffusers,
grilles, registers, lights, and other ceiling mounted devices or architectural ceiling treatments.
Denver Public Schools – Facility Management 23 31 00 HVAC Duct and Casings

1. Ducwork shop drawings and coordination drawings.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MATERIALS
A. General: all duct materials shall be non-combustible or conforming to requirements for Class 0 or Class 1 air
duct materials, as per UL 181 with limitations as noted in NFPA 90A.
B. Steel Ducts: ASTM A525 or ASTM A527 galvanized steel sheet, lock-forming quality, having zinc coating of
1.25 oz. per sq. ft. for each side in conformance with ASTM A90.
C. Aluminum Ducts: ANSI/ASTM B209; aluminum sheet, alloy 3003-H14. Aluminum Connectors and Bar Stock:
Alloy 6061-T6 or of equivalent strength.
D. Stainless Steel Ducts: ASTM A167, Type 304.
E. PVC-coated or stainless steel exhaust duct for chemicals or corrosive areas.
F. Sealant: non-hardening, non-asbestos, water resistant, UL classified as fire resistive, compatible with mating
materials.
G. Duct Liner: Manville Permacote Linacoustic Duct Liner, or equally-coated duct liner installed per
manufacturer’s recommendations. (for transfer ducts and sound boots ONLY).
H. Support members:
1. Galvanized all thread rods
2. Galvanized steel angles or painted unistrut.
2.02 MANUFACTURED DUCT JOINTS
A. Acceptable Manufacturer: Ductmate Industries, Inc. or approved equal.
B. Transverse duct joints may be made with the Ductmate System, or approved equal, components of standard
catalog manufacture.
C. Elbows: Provide radius elbows with throat radius (measured at inside surface) equal to duct depth should be
used wherever possible. Rectangular elbows are discouraged. If rectangular elbows are needed, they shall have
insulated turning vanes, with intermediate supports if the length of the vanes exceeds 36”. Edges of the turning
vanes shall be parallel with the sides of the elbow.
2.03 CASINGS
A. Fabricate casings in accordance with SMACNA HVAC Duct Construction Standards.
2.04 FIBROUS GLASS DUCTWORK AND LINER
A. Not allowed unless approved by PM as absolutely necessary.
2.05 VOLUME CONTROL DAMPERS
A. Do not install a volume damper with a frame that protrudes into an airstream.
B. Provide locking, indicating quadrant regulators on the volume control dampers.
C. Leakage rates shall comply with IECC 2015.
2.06 FIRE DAMPERS
A. Specify that fire dampers shall be constructed, tested, and labeled in accordance with UL555S Standard and
shall also be in compliance with NFPA 90A.
B. Specify that fire dampers shall be installed in accordance with their UL listing, NFPA 90A, and the
manufacturer’s installation instructions.
2.07 COMBINATION FIRE AND SMOKE DAMPERS
A. Combination fire/smoke dampers shall be constructed, tested, and labeled in accordance with UL555/UL555S
Standards and shall also be in compliance with NFPA 90A.
B. Combination fire/smoke dampers shall be installed in accordance with their UL listing, NFPA 90A, and the
manufacturer’s installation instructions.

C. Provide with electric (120V, 1) operators in the buildings.
D. Combination fire/smoke dampers shall be used in applications where both a fire damper and a smoke damper are
required.
2.08 SMOKE DAMPERS
A. Smoke dampers shall be constructed, tested, and labeled in accordance with UL555S Standard and shall also be
in compliance with NFPA 90A.
B. Smoke dampers shall be installed in accordance with their UL listing, NFPA 90A, and the manufacturer’s
installation instructions.
C. Provide with electric (120V, 1) operators in the building.
2.09 BACKDRAFT DAMPERS
A. Backdraft dampers furnished with air moving equipment may be air moving equipment manufacturer's standard
construction.
B. Provide gravity back-draft dampers for positive closure of air duct on exhaust systems.
C. Back-draft dampers of flexible materials are acceptable.
2.10 UNINSULATED TRIPLE-LOCK ALUMINUM ROUND DUCTWORK
1. Flexmaster Triple-Lock Type NI-TL Flexible Aluminum Air Duct.
2. Hercules.
3. Omni-Air.
4. Thermaire.
B. All aluminum metal flexible duct that is constructed without adhesive. Duct shall have UL 181 Class 0 Air Duct
listing and meet the requirements of NFPA 90A and 90B.
2.11 INSULATED TRIPLE-LOCK ALUMINUM ROUND DUCTWORK
A. All aluminum metal flexible duct that is constructed without adhesive. Duct shall have UL 181 Class 1 Air Duct
listing and meet the requirments of NFPA 90A and 90B. Insulation shall be fiberglass with thermal
conductance C factor < 0.23. Flame Spreed rating < 20 and Smoke Developed Rating < 25. Provide reinforced
metalized outer jacket and vapor barrier.
2.12 INSULATED FLEXIBLE ROUND DUCTWORK
A. Insulated flexible round duct shall be in accordance the Denver Building Department requirements.
1. Flexible duct shall meet the pressure class requirements of the system served.
2.13 FLEXIBLE DUCT FAN CONNECTIONS
A. Fabricate in accordance with SMACNA HVAC Duct Construction Standards, and as indicated.
B. UL-listed fire-resistant neoprene-coated woven glass fiber fabric to NFPA 90A, minimum density 30 oz. per sq.
yd. crimped into metal edging strip.
C. Provide a minimum of one (1) inch slack in these connections to insure that no vibration is transmitted from fan
to ductwork.
D. Exhaust ducts shall have flexible connections appropriate for the type of exhaust and NFPA/ IMC requirements.
2.14 DUCT ACCESS DOORS
A. Fabricate in accordance with SMACNA HVAC Duct Construction Standards as indicated.
B. Access doors with sheet metal screw fasteners are not acceptable.
2.15 TRANSITIONS
A. Diverging transitions shall not exceed 15 per side. Converging transitions shall not exceed 30 per side.

PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION
A. All flexible ductwork shall be secured to collars with metal bands. Plastic bands are not allowed. Length shall
not exceed six (6) feet, and shall be supported at least every three (3) feet.
B. All ductwork shall be installed per the most recent SMACNA and ASHRAE Guidelines for duct installation and
support except as modified herein.
C. Rigid metal ductwork shall be supported on trapeze carriers supporting the bottom surface of the duct.
D. Ductwork support structure shall be attached directly to building structural members or supplemental framing
members installed by the ductwork installer. Attachment to the decking is not permitted. Supplemental framing
members shall be attached directly to the building structural systems.
E. External duct insulation shall pass over trapeze support members so that the supporting member and the
ductwork are separated by the duct inusulation.
F. Volume Control Dampers shall be set and permanently marked or painted to indicate the damper position in the
final, balanced air volume condition.
G. All open ends of ducts shall be covered at end of day to protect against dust, water, etc.
3.02 SUPPORT SYSTEMS FOR DUCTWORK
A. All rigid ductwork shall be supported by trapeze construction supported directly from the building structure.
B. Support trapeze construction shall consist of all-thread rods and painted or galvanized support members
(unistrut or steel angle).
C. Duct insulation shall continue through support locations so that metal duct and support structure are separated
by the insulation.
3.03 ACCESS DOORS
A. Install duct access doors for inspection, maintenance and cleaning at all automatic dampers, fire and smoke
dampers, before duct turning vanes and before all booster coils.

SECTION 23 34 23
HVAC POWER VENTILATORS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Include rated capacities, furnished specialties, and accessories for each type of product indicated
and include the following:
1. Certified fan performance curves with system operating conditions indicated.
2. Certified fan sound-power ratings.
3. Motor ratings and electrical characteristics, plus motor and electrical accessories.
4. Material gauges and finishes, including color charts.
5. Dampers, including housings, linkages, and operators.
B. Coordination Drawings: Show fan room layout and relationships between components and adjacent structural
and mechanical elements. Show support locations, type of support, and weight on each support. Indicate and
certify field measurements.
C. Maintenance Data: For centrifugal fans to include in maintenance manuals specified in Division 1.
D. Quality Assurance Data:
1. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, Article 100,
by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for intended use.
2. NEMA Compliance: Motors and electrical accessories shall comply with NEMA standards.
3. AMCA Compliance: Products shall comply with performance requirements and shall be licensed to use the
AMCA-Certified Ratings Seal.
a) Fan ratings shall be based upon test performance in strict accordance with AMCA Standard 210-67
Test Code for Air Moving Devices.
4. Manufacturer's Qualifications: Firms regularly engaged in manufacture of specified fans with
characteristics, sizes, and capacities required, whose specified fan has been in satisfactory use in similar
service for not less than 3 years.
5. Codes and Standards: Comply with the following:
a) AMCA Compliance: Provide fans which have been tested and rated in accordance with AMCA
standards, and bear AMCA Certified Ratings Seal.
b) NEMA Compliance: Provide motors and electrical accessories complying with NEMA standards.
c) UL Compliance: Provide power ventilators which are designed, manufactured, and tested in
accordance with UL 705 "Power Ventilators".
E. General
1. All fans shall be statically and dynamically machine balanced and shall have solid shafts.
F. All fan motors shall operate within nameplate values and shall be in accordance with "Motors" paragraph in
Section 15070 Motors and Drives.Project Record Documents:
1. Shop Drawings: Detail equipment assemblies and indicate dimensions, weights, loads, required clearances,
method of field assembly, components, and location and size of each field connection.
a) Wiring Diagrams: Power, signal, and control wiring. Differentiate between manufacturer-installed and
field-installed wiring.
b) Design Calculations: Calculate requirements for selecting vibration isolators and seismic restraints and
for designing vibration isolation bases.
Denver Public Schools – Facility Management 23 34 23 HVAC Power Ventilators

c) Vibration Isolation Base Details: Detail fabrication, including anchorages and attachments to structure
and to supported equipment. Include auxiliary motor slides and rails, and base weights.
G. Operation and Maintenance Data:
2. Complete set of manufacturer’s drawings.
3. Complete documentation of inspections and tests performed, including any logs, curves, and certificates.
Documentation shall note any replacement of equipment or components that failed during testing.
4. Spare parts lists.
5. Data sheets updated to reflect field installation conditions.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS
A. Utility-Set Fans And Alternatives:
1. Acme
2. Barry Blower
3. Cook
4. Greenheck
5. Twin City
6. Trane
B. In-Line Tubular Centrifugal Fans:
1. Acme
2. Cook
3. Greenheck
4. Twin City
C. Propeller-Type Ventilation Fan:
1. Acme
2. Aerovent
3. Cook
4. Greenheck
5. Twin City Fans
D. Power Roof Ventilators:
1. Acme
2. Cook
3. Greenheck
4. Jenn-Air
5. Twin City Fans
E. Ceiling Type Exhaust Fans:
1. Acme
2. Cook
3. Greenheck

4. Jenn-Air
5. Pace
6. Twin City Fans
2.02 UTILITY SET FANS
A. Description: Belt-driven centrifugal fans consisting of housing, wheel, fan shaft, bearings, motor and disconnect
switch, drive assembly, and accessories.
B. Housing: Fabricated of steel with side sheets fully welded to scroll sheets.
1. Housing Discharge Arrangement: Adjustable to eight standard positions.
C. Fan Shaft: Turned, ground, and polished steel; keyed to wheel hub.
D. Shaft Bearings: Prelubricated and sealed, self-aligning, pillow-block-type ball bearings with ABMA 9, L50 of
200,000 hours.
E. Belt Drives: Factory mounted, with final alignment and belt adjustment made after installation.
1. Service Factor Based on Fan Motor: 1.5
2. Motor Pulleys: Adjustable pitch for use with motors through 5 hp; fixed pitch for use with motors larger
than 5 hp. Select pulley so pitch adjustment is at the middle of adjustment range at fan design conditions.
3. Belts: Oil resistant, nonsparking, and nonstatic; matched sets for multiple belt drives.
4. Belt Guards: Fabricate of steel for motors mounted on outside of fan cabinet.
F. When only design solution requires exposure to weather, specify weather covers with quick release fasteners for
ease of access to belts and bearings.
G. Greaseable bearings for all accessible fans. Zerks shall be located outside of fan housing and extended where
otherwise difficult to access.
2.03 CENTRIFUGAL ROOF VENTILATORS
A. Description: Belt-driven or direct-driven centrifugal fans consisting of housing, wheel, fan shaft, bearings,
motor and disconnect switch, drive assembly, curb base, and accessories.
B. Housing: Removable, spun-aluminum, dome top and outlet baffle or extruded-aluminum, rectangular top;
square, one-piece, aluminum base with venturi inlet cone.
1. Upblast Units: Provide spun-aluminum discharge baffle to direct discharge air upward, with rain and snow
drains and grease collector.
C. Fan Wheels: Aluminum hub and wheel with backward-inclined blades.
D. Belt-Driven Drive Assembly: Resiliently mounted to housing, with the following features:
1. Fan Shaft: Turned, ground, and polished steel; keyed to wheel hub.
2. Shaft Bearings: Permanently lubricated, permanently sealed, self-aligning ball bearings.
3. Pulleys: Cast-iron, adjustable-pitch motor pulley.
4. Fan and motor isolated from exhaust airstream.
E. Accessories:
1. Bird Screens: Removable, 1/2-inch mesh, aluminum or brass wire.
2. Dampers: Counterbalanced, parallel-blade, backdraft dampers mounted in curb base; factory set to close
when fan stops.
3. Motorized Dampers: Parallel-blade dampers mounted in curb base with electric actuator; wired to close
when fan stops.
F. Roof Curbs: Galvanized steel; mitered and welded corners; 1-1/2-inch-thick, rigid, fiberglass insulation adhered
to inside walls; and 1-1/2-inch wood nailer. Size as required to suit roof opening and fan base.
1. Overall Height: 12 inches.

2.04 AXIAL ROOF VENTILATORS
A. Description: Belt-driven or direct-driven axial fans consisting of housing, wheel, fan shaft, bearings, motor and
disconnect switch, drive assembly, curb base, and accessories.
B. Housing: Heavy-gage, removable, spun-aluminum, dome top and outlet baffle; square, one-piece, hinged,
aluminum base.
C. Fan Wheel: Steel hub and blades.
D. Belt-Driven Drive Assembly: Resiliently mounted to housing, with the following features:
3. Pulleys: Cast-iron, adjustable-pitch motor pulley.
E. Roof Curbs: Galvanized steel; mitered and welded corners; 1-1/2-inch- thick, rigid, fiberglass insulation
adhered to inside walls; and 1-1/2-inch wood nailer. Size as required to suit roof opening and fan base.
1. Overall Height: 12 inches.
2.05 CEILING-MOUNTING VENTILATORS
A. Description: Centrifugal fans designed for installing in ceiling or wall or for concealed in-line applications.
B. Housing: Heavy gauge steel, lined with acoustical insulation.
C. Fan Wheel: Centrifugal wheels directly mounted on motor shaft. Fan shrouds, motor, and fan wheel shall be
removable for service.
1. Grille: Stainless-steel, louvered grille with flange on intake and thumbscrew attachment to fan housing.
2. Motor speed not to exceed 1150 RPM.
2.06 IN-LINE CENTRIFUGAL FANS
A. Description: In-line, belt-driven centrifugal fans consisting of housing, wheel, outlet guide vanes, fan shaft,
bearings, motor and disconnect switch, drive assembly, mounting brackets, and accessories.
B. Housing: Split, only Cook requires split housing to service fan, spun aluminum with aluminum straightening
vanes, inlet and outlet flanges, and support bracket adaptable to floor, side wall, or ceiling mounting.
C. Direct-Driven Units: Factory wired to disconnect switch located on outside of fan housing.
D. Belt-Driven Units: Motor mounted on adjustable base, with adjustable sheaves, enclosure around belts within
fan housing, and lubricating tubes from fan bearings extended to outside of fan housing.
E. Fan Wheels: Aluminum, airfoil blades welded to aluminum hub.
F. Accessories.
2.07 PROPELLER FANS
A. Description: Belt-driven or direct-driven propeller fans consisting of fan blades, hub, housing, orifice ring,
motor, drive assembly, and accessories.
B. Housing: Galvanized steel sheet with flanged edges and integral orifice ring with baked-enamel finish coat
applied after assembly.
C. Fan Wheel: Replaceable, [cast-aluminum] [extruded-aluminum], airfoil blades fastened to cast-aluminum hub;
factory set pitch angle of blades.
D. Belt-Driven Drive Assembly: resiliently mounted to housing, statically and dynamically balanced and selected
for continuous operation at maximum rated fan speed and motor horsepower, with final alignment and belt
adjustment made after installation.
1. Service Factor Based on Fan Motor: 1.4.

a) Ball-Bearing Rating Life: ABMA 9, L10 of 100,000 hours.
4. Pulleys: Cast iron with split, tapered bushing; dynamically balanced at factory.
5. Motor Pulleys: Adjustable pitch for use with motors through 5 hp; fixed pitch for use with motors larger
than 5 hp. Select pulley so pitch adjustment is at the middle of adjustment range at fan design conditions.
6. Belts: Oil resistant, nonsparking, and nonstatic; matched sets for multiple belt drives.
7. Belt Guards: Fabricate of steel for motors mounted on outside of fan cabinet.
E. Accessories:
1. Gravity Shutters: Aluminum blades in aluminum frame; interlocked blades with nylon bearings.
2. Motor-Side Back Guard: Galvanized steel, complying with OSHA specifications, removable for
maintenance.
3. Wall Sleeve: Galvanized steel to match fan and accessory size.
4. Weathershield Hood: Galvanized steel to match fan and accessory size.
5. Weathershield Front Guard: Galvanized steel with expanded metal screen.
2.08 MOTORS
A. Comply with requirements in Division 23.
B. Enclosure Type: guarded dripproof.
C. Belt-drive motors over 5 HP shall have dual push-pull adjustment screws for the motor mounts. For retrofits,
require that the motor mounts be replaced if not of this type.
D. When fans and/or motors are located in a hazardous environment or are handling an explosive or potentially-
explosive airstream, specify spark-resistant fan construction and explosion-proof motors, as required. The fan
should be specified to meet AMCA Spark Resistant Construction, Type A, B, or C as required. The fan and
motor should both be well grounded.
E. If the design fan RPM at design airflow rate and pressure approaches within 10% of the maximum safe fan RPM
as listed by the manufacturer for that class of fan, specify a more heavy-duty class of fan. This will provide a
safety margin to allow for adverse field conditions which can increase the fan system pressure. This margin of
safety can also perhaps allow for some possible future changes.
2.09 Drives:
A. Provide direct drive fans where possible.
B. Single belt drives shall not be used on equipment with 1 HP motor and above.
C. Drives shall always be installed with provisions for center distance adjustment.
D. Motors shall be located on their respective motor bases allowing for 1/6 of the total motor base travel for
installation of new belts with remaining 5/6 of the travel available for belt tightening
E. Arc of contact on the smaller sheave should not be less than 120 degrees.
F. Ratios of sheaves should not exceed 8 to 1.
G. Belt speed should not exceed 5000 feet per minute.
H. A full and free circulation of air should be around the drive at all times.
I. Drives operating in explosive atmosphere or potentially explosive should be well grounded and be equipped
with static conducting non-sparking belts.
J. Provide OSHA-approved belt-drive covers with tachometer access, with side made of expanded metal.
K. Rated for 150 percent (minimum) of fan motor power.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION
A. Install power ventilators level and plumb.

B. Support units using spring isolators having a static deflection of 1 inch. Vibration devices are specified in
Specification Section 23 05 48 Mechanical Sound and Vibration.
1. Secure vibration control to concrete bases using anchor bolts cast in concrete base.
C. Install floor-mounting units on concrete bases. Concrete, reinforcement, and formwork requirements are
specified in Division 3 Section Cast-in-Place Concrete.
D. Ceiling Units: Suspend units from structure; use steel wire or metal straps.
E. Support suspended units from structure using threaded steel rods and spring hangers.
F. Install units with clearances for service and maintenance.
G. Label units according to requirements specified in Specification Section 23 05 53 Identification for HVAC.
H. All roof mounted fans and equipment need to comply with Section 07 72 00 Roof Curbs
I. Install fan inlet and outlet screens for personnel protection when no ductwork will be present.

SECTION 23 35 00
SPECIAL EXHAUST SYSTEMS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data:
1. Component and accessories list for fume hoods, exhaust fans, dust collectors, ductwork, flammable liquid
and chemical storage cabinets.
3. Finishes and colors.
1. All fume hoods, chemical storage cabinets, etc. shall comply with NFPA 30 Flammable and Combustible
Liquids Code and NFPA 45 Standard for Fire Protection for Laboratories Using Chemicals. Room
requirements shall be in accordance with NFPA 101 Life Safety Code.
1. Shop Drawings:
a) Hazardous exhaust duct routing and discharge from the building.
b) Elevation and outline drawings with dimensions.
c) Plan view drawings with dimensions.
D. Operation and Maintenance Data:
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 HAZARDOUS EXHAUST FANS
A. Single-width, single-inlet type arranged for indicated service and constructed for duty at indicated system design
pressure and temperature not to exceed 150 degrees
B. Continuously welded Type 304L stainless steel scroll with required reinforcement and expoy coating, flanged
inlet and outlet connections, inlet bolted to scroll side sheet, threaded and plugged scroll drain, quickbolted
access door with gasket; Carbon steel shaft, fitted with heat slinger grease lubricated stuffing box; continuously
welded Type 304L stainless steel impeller assembly.
1. Epoxy Coating: Conform to MIL-P-23236, Type I, Class 1 or MIL-P-24441 system, Formula 150 green
primer 3 mils, Formula 151 haze gray 3 mils, and Formula 152 white 3 mils.
C. Mount complete assembly including motor, power transmission components, and guards on a common vibration
isolation base with spring mountings.
2.02 DUST COLLECTION SYSTEMS
1. Torit
Denver Public Schools – Facility Management 23 35 00 Special Exhaust Systems

2. Koger
3. Dustex Corp.
B. Provide a complete continuous duty cyclone dust collection system.
C. Unit shall be factory assembled and shipped in components. Components shall be welded and bolted, suitable
for 20-inch w.c. pressure. The bottom cone section shall be removeable. Motor and fan assembly shall be by the
same manufacturer as the collector. The fan and motor may be shipped separately and assembled on site.
D. Provide flanged inlet connection to collector unit.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION
A. Install in accordance to NFPA 91, and SMACNA Rectangle Duct Const, and SMACNA Rnd Duct Const.
Provide mounting and supports for equipment, ductwork, and accessories, including structural supports, hangers,
vibration isolators, stands, clamps and brackets, access doors, blast gates, and dampers. Construct positive
pressure duct inside buildings airtight.
B. Special installation requirements for ductwork for corrosive fume and vapor exhaust:
1. Slope horizontal ducts one inch in 40 feet in the direction of air flow or one inch in 10 feet in the direction
opposite to airflow. Where necessary, slope duct to common drainage point.
2. Provide drains at low points, at internal duct restrictions, at base of risers and where indicated.
3. Provide drain connections of one inch pipe size corrosion resistant steel couplings welded to duct and
provided with polytetrafluoroethylene paste lubricated PVC plug where drainage piping is not indicated.
4. Provide drain lines with a trap of one inch greater depth than the positive or negative pressure in the duct
but not less than 2 inches.
5. Provide duct support system to include additional weight due to collection or condensate deflected surface
and other areas.
6. Provide duct supports and building structure attachments in accordance with SMACNA Rectangle Duct
Const and SMACNA Rnd Duct Const.
Denver Public Schools – Facility Management 23 35 00 Special Exhaust Systems

SECTION 23 36 00
AIR THERMAL UNITS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data:
1. Terminal Units component and accessories list.
1. Certified production test reports or mill test reports.
2. Test reports for previous design, and documentation showing previous design ratings and configurations.
3. Terminal unit performance and sound rating shall be tested and rated in accordance with ARI 880 “Industry
Standard for Air Terminals” and shall bear the ARI certification seal.
C. VAV units shall be in full compliance with UL-181 and NFPA 90A and shall meet bacteriological standards of
ASTM C665.Project Record Documents:
1. Shop Drawings:
a) Terminal unit ratings, capacities, flows, dimensions and construction materials.
b) Wiring and termination drawings.
2. Complete set of manufacturers drawings.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 VARIABLE-VOLUME AIR TERMINAL UNITS
A. Manufacturer:
1. Anemostat
2. Environmental Technologies
3. Metal-Aire
4. Tempmaster
5. Titus
6. Trane
B. Configuration: Diverting-damper assembly inside unit casing with control components located inside a
protective metal shroud.
C. Casing: 0.034-inch steel or 22 gage minimum.
1. Casing Lining: 1/2-inch-thick, coated, fibrous-glass duct liner complying with ASTM C 1071; secured with
adhesive.
Denver Public Schools – Facility Management 23 36 00 Air Thermal Units

2. Air Inlet: Round stub connection for duct attachment.
3. Air Outlet: S-slip and drive connections.
4. Access: Removable panels for access to diverter and other parts requiring service, adjustment, or
maintenance; with airtight gasket.
5. Casing shall be solid double wall for healthcare, cleanroom, or lab applications.
D. Hot-Water Heating Coil: Copper tube, mechanically expanded into aluminum-plate fins; leak tested underwater
to 200 psig; and factory installed.
E. Sound attenuation section: Included as a factory provided component.
F. Controls:DDC controls provided by section 25 00 00 Integrated Automation. Refer to Section 25 50 00
Integrated Building Automation System (IBAS) for interface requirements.
2.02 CONSTANT-VOLUME (FAN POWERED) AIR TERMINAL UNITS
A. Manufacturers:
1. Metal-Aire
2. Anemostat
3. Environmental Technologies
4. Tempmaster
5. Titus
6. Trane
B. Configuration: Volume-damper assembly and fan in series or in parallel arrangement inside unit casing with
control components inside a protective metal shroud.
C. Casing: 0.034-inch steel or 22 gauge minimum.
1. Casing Lining: 1/2-inch- thick, coated, fibrous-glass duct liner complying with ASTM C 1071; secured
with adhesive.
2. Air Inlets: Round stub connections or S-slip and drive connections for duct attachment.
3. Air Outlet: S-slip and drive connections.
4. Access: Removable panels for access to dampers and other parts requiring service, adjustment, or
maintenance; with airtight gasket and quarter-turn latches.
5. Casing shall be solid double wall for healthcare, cleanroom, or lab applications.
D. Volume Damper: Galvanized steel with peripheral gasket and self-lubricating bearings.
1. Maximum Damper Leakage: ARI 880 rated, 3 percent of nominal airflow at 3” wg inlet static pressure.
2. Damper Position: Normally closed.
E. Fan Section: Galvanized-steel plenum, with direct-drive, forward-curved fan with air filter and backdraft
damper.
1. Motor: Multispeed. Comply with requirements in Division 23 Motors.
a) Speed Control: Infinitely adjustable with pneumatic-electric and electronic controls.
b) Fan-Motor Assembly Isolation: Rubber isolators.
2. Air Filter: Refer to specification section 23 40 00 HVAC Air Cleaning Devices.
F. Hot-Water Heating Coil: Copper tube, mechanically expanded into aluminum-plate fins; leak tested underwater
to 200 psig; and factory installed.
G. Sound attenuation section: Included as a factory provided component.

H. Factory-Mounted and -Wired Controls: Controllers shall be by Integrated Controls Systems, Inc. provided by
the controls contractor to be factory mounted. Electrical components shall be mounted in control box with
removable cover. Incorporate single-point electrical connection to power source.
1. Control Transformer: Factory mounted for control voltage on electric and electronic control units with
terminal strip in control box for field wiring of thermostat and power source.
2. Wiring Terminations: Fan and controls to terminal strip, and terminal lugs shall match quantities, sizes, and
materials of branch-circuit conductors. Enclose terminal lugs in terminal box that is sized according to
NFPA 70.
3. Disconnect Switch: Factory-mounted, fused type.
I. Control Panel Enclosure:
1. NEMA 250, Type 1, with access panel sealed from airflow and mounted on side of unit.
J. Control Sequence:
1. Refer to Specification Section 23 90 00 Integrated Auto Control Sequences for Facility.
2. Connect to Integrated Building Automation System. Refer to Section 25 50 00 - Intelligent Building
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION
A. Install air terminal units level and plumb. Maintain sufficient clearance for normal service and maintenance.
B. Connect ducts to air terminal units according to Specification Section 23 31 00 HVAC Duct and Casing.
C. Hot-Water Piping: In addition to requirements in Specification Section 23 11 13 Hydronic Piping, connect
heating coils to supply with shutoff valve, strainer, control valve, and union or flange; and to return with
balancing valve and union or flange.
A. Perform the following field tests and inspections and prepare test reports:
1. After installing air terminal units and after electrical circuitry has been energized, test for compliance with
requirements.
2. Leak Test: After installation, fill water coils and test for leaks. Repair leaks and retest until no leaks exist.
3. Operational Test: After electrical circuitry has been energized, start units to confirm proper motor rotation
and unit operation.
B. Remove and replace malfunctioning units and retest as specified above.

SECTION 23 37 13
DIFFUSERS, REGISTERS, AND GRILLES
PART 1 GENERAL
A. Test and rate performance of air outlets and inlets in accordance with ADC Equipment Test Code 1062 and
ASHRAE 70.
B. Test and rate performance of louvers in accordance with AMCA 500.
1.02 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data:
1. Diffusers, grilles, and registers.
2. Louvers.
3. Louvered Penthouses, Gravity Intakes and Reliefs
1. Sound Test Data and Criteria.
1. Shop Drawings.
2. Product cut sheets.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 DIFFUSERS, GRILLES, AND REGISTERS
A. Ceiling Diffusers:
1. Ceiling diffusers shall be rectangular/square louvered type diffuser.
B. Ceiling Registers and Grilles:
1. Ceiling supply registers and grilles (adjustable curved blades).
2. Ceiling exhaust and return registers and grilles (louvered rectangular).
3. Ceiling grid core exhaust and return registers and grilles (egg crate).
C. Ceiling Slot Diffusers.
D. Ceiling Linear Exhaust and Return Grilles.
E. Wall Supply Registers and Grilles:
1. Wall Supply Registers and Grilles shall be heavy duty gauge with integral volume damper and 2 way throw.
2. Registers and grilles shall have tamper-proof hardware.
F. Wall Exhaust and Return Registers and Grilles:
1. Wall exhaust and return registers and grilles shall be heavy duty gauge with integral volume damper and 2-
way throw.
2. Registers and grilles shall have tamper-proof hardware.
G. Linear Wall Supply Registers and Grilles.
2.02 LOUVERS:
A. Louvers:
Denver Public Schools – Facility Management 23 37 13 Diffusers, Registers, and Grilles

1. Louvers shall be drainable and have a mesh bird/bug screen.
B. Louvered Penthouses:
1. Penthouses shall be drainable and have a mesh bird/bug screen.
2. Penthouses louvers shall have 18” insulated roof curb.
2.03 GRAVITY ROOF HOODS AND VENTILATORS:
A. Gravity Roof Hoods:
1. Fabricate air inlet or exhaust hoods in accordance with SMACNA HVAC Duct Construction Standards.
B. Gravity Roof Ventilators.
2.04 GOOSENECKS:
A. Fabricate in accordance with SMACNA HVAC Duct Construction Standards. Provide removable screen in
discharge. Discharge to be cut back 45. Opening of discharge shall not face north or west.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION
A. Install diffusers, registers, and grilles level and plumb, according to manufacturer's written instructions,
Coordination Drawings, original design, and referenced standards.
B. Closely coordinate installation of ceiling mounted devices with the lighting plan.
C. Provide access to balancing dampers and control devices.
D. All diffusers, grilles, and registers shall be selected to meet a Noise Criteria (NC) of 30 or less.
E. Intake louvers, penthouses, and hoods shall be sized for maximum velocity of 500 fpm. Exhaust, relief,
louvers, penthouses, and hoods shall be sized for maximum velocity of 750 fpm.
F. All diffusers, grilles, and registers shall be scheduled on the drawings. Indicate the device identification tag and
air flow on the drawings.
G. Intake and exhaust louvers, penthouses and hoods shall be scheduled on the drawings. Provide identification tag
and airflow on the drawings.
Denver Public Schools – Facility Management 23 37 13 Diffusers, Registers, and Grilles

SECTION 23 38 13
COMMERCIAL-KITCHEN HOODS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
A. Operating Sequences: Operating sequences outlined below are a guideline only. Modify operating sequences
as appropriate for each building and each project.
1. Initial State: This state would exist anytime there is a power outage, control power is off, or after an alarm
condition has been cleared.
2. Gas Reset Condition: After power is restored and/or all alarm conditions are reset, the automatic gas valve
must be manually reset (to avoid standing pilot gas entering the kitchen). Manual reset of the gas valve
cannot be accomplished unless all alarm conditions are normal, the control power is on, and the hood
exhaust fan is running. Standing pilots shall be lit manually.
3. Cooking State: This is the normal condition. The kitchen hood exhaust fan must be turned on in order to
activate the make-up air fan (automatically started) and to enable the electrical power under the hood.
Hood lights can be controlled manually independent of the kitchen hood exhaust fan operationby a wall
mounted toggle switch.
4. Ansul Activation: This is activated by either melting the fusible link under the range hood or by manual
pull at the Ansul system pull station. Activation of the Ansul system allows discharge of fire suppression
chemicals on the range, fryers or other under-hood equipment where code-required fire suppression is
mandatory. Ansul system activation will also turn on the hood exhaust fan (if not on already), turn off the
make-up air unit, close the automatic gas valve, shut down all electrical power under the hood, turn off the
hood lights and signal the building fire alarm system that an alarm condition exists.
B. Relay Logic:
1. Reference drawing at end of section for relay ladder diagram operation described below.
2. A motorized gas valve is installed in the gas piping serving the appliances under the hood. The gas valve
opens when power is applied to it. To reset the gas valve, power is applied to relay R2 by pressing the
momentary pushbutton energizing R2 and closing contact R2-2, which will hold in relay R2. Whenever the
gas valve is energized, a green LED on the front of the panel turns on indicating “GAS VALVE ON”.
3. To turn on the hood exhaust fan, make-up air fan and electrical circuits for appliances under the hood, turn
on the fan switch. This energizes relay R1, which closes contacts R1-1, R1-2 and R1-3. R1-1 energizes a
multi-pole contactor that controls electric circuits serving equipment under the hood, such as steamers,
fryers, and stoves. When the contactor is energized, a green LED on the front of the panel indicates
“APPLIANCES ON”. Contact R1-2 allows the gas valve to open once the exhaust fan is running. Contact
R1-3 automatically starts the make-up air fan. Once the make-up air fan is running, it automatically starts
the hood exhaust fan. A green LED on the front of the panel indicates “HOOD EXHAUST FAN ON”.
Another green LED on the front of the panel indicates “MAKE-UP AIR FAN ON”.
4. When the chemical fire suppression system (Ansul system) is activated, relay A1 is energized. Contact A1-
3 opens, which de-energizes relay TD and closes the gas valve. Contact A1-5 closes turning on the hood
exhaust fan (if it is not on already). Contact A1-1 opens, de-energizing relay EC and opening the
contactor, which de-energizes all electric circuits under the hood. Contact A1-4 opens and turns off the
make-up air fan. Contact A1-3 energizes sending an alarm to the building fire alarm system (dedicated
zone). Contact A1-2 will also open de-energizing the lights under the hood.
5. Power is removed from the under-hood lights when the wet chemical system is activated.
Denver Public Schools – Facility Management 23 38 13 Commercial-Kitchen Hoods

6. TABLE OF STATES FOR VARIOUS CONDITIONS
MAKE UNDER HOOD UNDER GAS FIRE ANSUL

EXHAUST
ACTION -UP POWER HOOD VALVE ALARM SYSTEM
HOOD FAN
AIR LIGHTS
FAN
Initial state (control OFF OFF Automatic OFF ON/OFF Closed Normal Normal
power off)
Gas (Reset) Activation ON ON Automatic ON ON/OFF Open Normal Normal
Cooking State Automa
(normal) ON tic ON Automatic ON ON/OFF Open Normal Normal
Auto ON Auto Auto
Ansul Activation Auto Auto OFF OFF Closed Alarm Activated
OFF
1.02 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data:
2. Submit shop drawings of the kitchen hood fire control panel showing all relays, contacts and contactors
required for the operation of the system.
3. Shop drawings must be coordinated with the range hood submittal, make-up air unit submittal, automatic
gas valve submittal, etc.
B. Operation and Maintenance Data:
1. Provide complete ladder diagram of the panel operation, which includes relay numbers and the devices they
control. Relays within the panel must be numbered to correspond to the diagram. Provide a diagram for
the Operations and Maintenance Manual and install a diagram within the panel.
2. Provide documentation of the panel re-start procedure.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 FABRICATION
A. Panel Manufacturer: Easter Owens or pre-approved equivalent.
B. Fabricate the panel from commercially available parts. Panel shall not be fabricated in the field. Panel shall be
fabricated by a panel shop and shall be UL listed as an assembly or Factory Mutual label or other third party
label acceptable to the State of Colorado Electrical Board for the use intended.
C. The panel shall be a surface-mounted steel or aluminum box with a keyed lock. Comply with Division 26.
2.02 INDICATING LIGHTS
A. Provide LED type indicating lights to show the conditions of the system per diagram at end of section.
2.03 IDENTIFICATION AND TAGGING
A. Comply with division 26 for panel and wiring identification.
B. Label components, such as relays and pushbuttons in the panel, as well.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION
A. Contractor shall install panel and interconnect wiring with range hood, makeup air unit, underhood lights and
power, range hood control panel, fire suppression panel, gas reset buttons, fire alarm system, and exhaust hood.
B. Top of panel mounted maximum 6’6” above finished floor.

3.02 TESTING AND DEMONSTRATION
A. The completed system must be tested in the presence of the DPS Project Manager. The proper operation of the
panel must be demonstrated, including the re-start procedure.
B. Panel testing and demonstration for DPS personnel will be in addition to tests and inspections required by Code
Authorities having jurisdiction.


SECTION 23 40 00
HVAC AIR CLEANING DEVICES
PART 1 GENERAL
A. Filter media shall be ANSI/UL 900 listed, Class 1 or Class 2, as approved by local authorities.
B. Provide all filters as product of one manufacturer.
C. Assemble filter components to form filter banks from products of one manufacturer.
D. All air supplied by a forced air-type unit, or system shall be filtered.
E. Single filter installation or a pre-filter/intermediate filter combination shall be upstream from the coils.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 REUSABLE PANEL FILTER MEDIA FRAMES
A. Manufacturers: same as the air handling unit provided by the mechanical contractor.
B. Holding Frames: PVC extuded, channel frame with 2”x2” welded wire fabric on outlet side and inlet side.,
hinged with pull and retaining handles.
1. Shall be permanent-style designed for replaceable media. Metal filter frames shall be provided by the
manufacturer of the air handling equipment.
2. Frames shall be vinyl channel design that pressure locks the filter media in place. The wire mesh shall be
1”x1”, 16 gauge welded wire.
3. Frame construction shall provide a competent seal of the filter media in order to minimize air flow bypass.
Frames shall have mitered corners secured by spring steel corner clips, one at each corner for the 1 ½”
frames. Wire mesh shall be continuously supported on all sides and held in place by metal rivets or retainer
clips. Frame size shall be clearly marked on one side of each frame.
2.02 EXTENDED SURFACE RETAINED MEDIA FILTERS
A. Manufacturers:
1. Fiberbond:
a) Standard Efficiency: FP100
b) High Efficiency: Dustlok
B. Media:
1. Media shall be at least UL-Class II.
2. Minimum media performance and particle efficiency shall be:
a) Weight: 11.0 oz. per sq. yd.
3. Minimum performance (24” x 24” x 1-1/2” media):
a) 0.21” w.c. resistance at 300 fpm.
b) 30 percent ASHRAE efficiency
c) 92 percent average weight resistance
d) 221 gm. dust-holding capacity at 1.0” w.c.
4. Minimum particle efficiency:
a) 46.1 percent at 1 to 5 microns
b) 86.1 percent at 5 to 10 microns
c) 89.3 percent over 10 microns
Denver Public Schools – Facility Management 23 40 00 HVAC Air Cleaning Devices

2.03 HIGH-EFFICIENCY PARTICULATE AIR (HEPA) FILTERS
A. Manufacturers:
1. American Air Filter.
2. Farr.
3. Flanders.
4. MSA.
5. Weber.
B. Media: Pleated, water-resistant glass fiber with aluminum separators; ANSI/UL 586; in 16-gage zinc-coated
steel holding frame; nominal size 24” x 24” x 12” deep.
C. Rating: 0.3 micron dioctyl phthalate smoke (DOP) to 99.97 percent efficiency, in accordance with MIL-STD-
282 thermal (DOP) penetration test method; 250 fpm face velocity, 1.0” w.g. initial resistance, 3.0” w.g.
recommended final resistance.
D. FILTER FRAMES
1. General: Fabricate filter frames and supporting structures of extruded PVC, channel material with necessary
gasketing between frames and walls.
E. Side Servicing Housings:
1. Flanged for insertion into ductwork, or reinforced 16-gauge galvanized steel; access doors with continuous
gasketing and positive locking devices on both sides; extruded aluminum tracks or channels for primary
<and secondary>,<secondary and tertiary> filters with positive sealing gaskets.
F. After-filter, where required, shall be on the discharge side of the fan and downstream from all coils.
G. FILTER GAUGES
1. Acceptable Manufacturer:
a) Dwyer
2. Direct Reading Dial: 4-¾“ O.D. diaphragm-actuated dial in metal case, vent valves, black figures on white
background, front recalibration adjustment, appropriate ranges of 0.05, 0-1.0, 0-2.0, 0-3.0 or 0-4.0” w.g.,
two (2) percent of full scale accuracy; Magnehelic Series 2000, manufactured by Dwyer.
H. Accessories: Static pressure tips with integral compression fittings, ¼“ aluminum tubing, two-way or three-way
vent valves.
I. Inclined manometer: Not acceptable.
2.04 Electric Ionization Filtration
A. Acceptable ManufacturerL
1. Costatron 3000 Room Vent.
B. Description: Integral centrifugal fan unit with Cosatron ionization filtration unit, pre-filter, SCR speed
controller, dirty filter switch and indicator light.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION
A. All air supplied by a forced air-type unit, or system shall be filtered.
B. Adequate clearances must be allowed for cleaning or changing filters.
C. Single filter installation or a pre-filter/intermediate filter combination shall be upstream from the coils.
D. The initial set of filter media is to be used for testing and trial use, and may not necessarily be replaced at project
completion.
E. Pre-filters shall be included during the construction phase and shall be considered for permanent installation
where necessary.

F. Each filter bank shall be equipped with a Magnehelic (or similar) gauge that indicates static pressure drop across
the filters.
G. The design change-out pressure drop, in inches water gauge, shall be indicated on the gauge.
H. Provide extra stock to insure that a completely clean set of filter media is available at project completion.
I. Provide filters upstream of all coils, including heat recovery units.
J. Construction filters shall be replaced with permanent filters and filter frames after construction clean up is
complete.

SECTION 23 51 00
BREECHINGS, CHIMNEYS AND STACKS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data:
1. Type B Flue Vents.
2. Positive Pressure Chimney and Manifold System.
3. All Fuel Chimney.
4. Barometric Damper.
5. Special Gas Vent
1. Source Limitations: obtain listed system components through one source from a single manufacturer.
1. Shop Drawings:
a) For vents, breechings, chimneys, and stacks: include plans, elevations, sections, details, and
attachments to other work.
b) Detail equipment assemblies and indicate dimensions, weights, loads, required clearances, methods of
field assembly, components, hangers and seismic restraints, and location and size of each field
connection.
c) Welding certificates.
d) Warranties: Special warranties specified in this section.
1.02 WARRANTY
A. Special Warranty: manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components
of venting system that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. Failures include, but
are not limited to, structural failures caused by expansion and contraction.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 TYPE B FLUE VENTS
A. Manufacturers:
1. Ameri-Vent, American Metal Products Co.
2. Dura-Vent Corporation.
3. Metal Fab, Inc.
4. Metlvent, Hart and Cooley Division of Clevepak Corporation.
5. Selkirk Metalbestos (No asbestos acceptable)
B. General: double wall gas vents, U.L.-listed for Type B, consisting of double wall metal construction pipe
sections and fittings and accessories required for complete installation.
C. Termination:
Denver Public Schools – Facility Management 23 51 00 Breechings, Chimneys and Stacks

1. Stack cap designed to exclude 90 percent of rainfall.
2. Round chimney top designed to exclude 98 percent of rainfall.
3. Exit cone with drain section incorporated into riser.
2.02 POSITIVE PRESSURE CHIMNEY AND MANIFOLD SYSTEM
A. Manufacturers:
1. Ampco
2. Metal Fab
3. Selkirk Metalbestos Model PS.
4. Van-Packer
5. Venting Systems Inc. Trip-L-Wall.
B. General: double wall metal chimney, U.L.-listed for use with building heating equipment burning gas, solid or
liquid fuels as described in NFPA (304 stainless steel liner for gas and No. 2 oil).
C. Accessories:
1. Fittings: tees, elbows, increasers, draft-hood connectors, metal caps with bird barriers, adjustable roof
flashings, storm collars, support assemblies, thimbles, firestop spacers, and fasteners; fabricated from
similar or compatible materials and designs.
2. Sealant (for positive-pressure applications): manufacturer's standard high-temperature sealant.
3. Insulating Fill: manufacturer's standard high-temperature insulation fill material in annular space
surrounding chimney liner including high-temperature, ceramic-fiber insulation required to seal chimney at
top and bottom.
2.03 ALL FUEL CHIMNEY
A. Manufacturers:
1. Ampco.
2. Dura-Vent Corporation Dura-Chimney.
3. Hart and Cooley Metlvent.
4. Selkirk Metalbestos Model SS.
5. Metal Fab.
6. Van-Packer.
B. General: stainless steel double-walled, pre-insulated chimney sections, fittings, and accessories required for a
complete installation in compliance with UL Standard 103.
C. Accessories: tees, elbows, increasers, draft-hood connectors, terminations, adjustable roof flashings, storm
collars, support assemblies, thimbles, firestop spacers, and fasteners; fabricated from similar materials and
designs as vent-pipe straight sections; all listed for same assembly.
2.04 SPECIAL GAS VENT
A. Manufactures:
1. Security Chimney.
2. Metal-Fab Not Allowed.
2.05 BAROMETRIC DAMPER
A. Manufacturers: Field Control Division of Conco Engineering Works.
B. Construction: heavy duty design with stainless steel knife-edge bearing and precision balanced gate.
C. Control: adjustable wide range of draft settings from .002 inches to .5 inches.
2.06 GUYING AND BRACING MATERIALS

A. Cable: Four galvanized, stranded wires of the following thickness:
1. Minimum size: 1/4 inch in diameter.
2. For ID sizes 4 to 15 inches: 5/16 inch.
B. Pipe: Galvanized steel, NPS 1-1/4.
C. Angle Iron: Galvanized steel, 2 by 2 by 0.25 inch.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION
A. Install in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions to assure UL compliance.
B. Locate to comply with minimum clearances from combustibles and minimum termination heights according to
product listing or NFPA 211, whichever is most stringent.
C. Seal between sections of positive-pressure vents according to manufacturer's written installation instructions,
using sealants recommended by manufacturer.
D. Support vents at intervals recommended by manufacturer to support weight of vents and all accessories, without
exceeding appliance loading.
E. For appliances more than 83 percent efficient, slope breechings down in direction of appliance, with condensate
drain connection at lowest point piped to nearest drain.
3.02 VENT SCHEDULE
A. Listed Chimney Liners: High-efficiency boiler or furnace vents in masonry chimney, dishwasher exhaust, or
Type II commercial kitchen hood.
B. Listed Type B Vents: Vents for certified gas appliances.
C. Listed Special Gas Vent: Condensing gas appliances.
D. Listed Building-Heating-Appliance Chimneys: Dual-fuel boilers, oven vents, water heaters, and exhaust for
engines. Fireplaces and other solid-fuel-burning appliances.
E. Listed Grease Ducts: Type I commercial kitchen grease duct.
3.03 INSTALLATION OF LISTED VENTS AND CHIMNEYS
A. Locate to comply with minimum clearances from combustibles and minimum termination heights according to
product listing or NFPA 211, whichever is most stringent.
B. Seal between sections of positive-pressure vents and grease exhaust ducts according to manufacturer's written
installation instructions, using sealants recommended by manufacturer.
C. Support vents at intervals recommended by manufacturer to support weight of vents and all accessories, without
exceeding appliance loading.
D. Slope breechings down in direction of appliance, with condensate drain connection at lowest point piped to
nearest drain.
E. Lap joints in direction of flow.
F. Connect base section to foundation using anchor lugs of size and number recommended by manufacturer.
G. Join sections with acid-resistant joint cement to provide continuous joint and smooth interior finish.
H. Erect stacks plumb to finished tolerance of no more than 1 inch out of plumb from top to bottom.

SECTION 23 52 16
CONDENSING BOILERS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data:
1. Shop Drawings:
3. Complete documentation of inspections and tests performed, including any logs and certificates.
1.02 WARRANTY
A. Special Warranty: manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace heat
exchangers damaged by thermal shock or cindensate corrosion within within specified warranty period.
1. Warranty Period for Heat Exchangers: 20 years from date of Substantial Completion.
2. Warranty Period for Vent Dampers (where applicapble) : Five years from date of substantial completion.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 BOILER , HOT WATER, CONDENSING
1. Aerco Benchmark.
2. Lochinvar Crest.
3. Riello Array.
B. Type: forced draft, fire tube boiler with positive pressure vent discharge. Factory-assembled and tested.
Condensing with operating effiency up to 98%.
C. Construction:
1. Tube bundle assembly to consist of 316 stainless steel tubes, 2" diameter supported by steel frame with
expansion joints at each corner. Headers to be 5/8" pressure vessel steel.
Denver Public Schools – Facility Management 23 52 16 Condensing Boilers

D. Pressure rating:
1. 125 psi minimum working pressure, ASME stamped.
E. Burner: Forced Draft
1. Burner head shall be cast stainless steel.
2. All burner material exposed to the combustion zone shall be of stainless steel construction.
3. Burner to be designed to burn natural gas.
4. Electronic supervised spark ignition.
5. Burner operation to be modulating firing with minimum of 10:1 turndown.
6. Burner Safety Controls:
a) Electric safety controls to be U.L. and A.G.A. design certified.
b) Scanner or ultraviolet flame detector.
c) Air flow switch.
7. Start-up by factory-authorized agent only.
F. Fuel: Natural Gas [936 BTU/CF @ 5200 ft. elevation] Inlet gas pressure to burner to be 7" to 11" W.G.
G. Boiler Controls and Trim:
1. Operating controls L6006A1012.
2. Hi-limit controls L4006E1117.
3. Safety low water cut-off.
4. Electronic supervised spark ignition.
5. ASME pressure relief valve set at proper psi, for operating conditions.
6. Combination temperature/pressure gauge.
7. Built-in air elimination.
8. Control panel with indicating lights with ability to operate, stage, and modulate multiple boilers to optimize
efficiency.
9. ASME CSD-1 compliance.
10. Controllers shall use BACnet protocol to integrate with the Integrated Building Automation System. Refer
to Section 230901 – Integrated Building Automation System (IBAS) for more details.
11. Condensate neutralization kit.
H. Gas Train:
1. U.L. and IRI-listed gas train completely factory assembled.
2. Main and pilot gas shut-off valves.
3. Main gas pressure regulator.
4. Main gas valve.
5. Low and High gas pressure gas switches on all sizes.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION
A. Boilers shall have start-up, testing, adjusting, instruction of owners operating personnel and 90 days free service
by factory-authorized service representative start-up personnel who are on 24 hour call.
B. Install flue and vent per manufacturer’s recommendations and specification section 235100 Breechings,
Chimneys, and Stacks.
C. Perform installation and startup checks according to manufacturer's written instructions.

D. Leak Test: Hydrostatic test. Repair leaks and retest until no leaks exist.
E. Operational Test: Start units to confirm proper motor rotation and unit operation. Adjust air-fuel ratio and
combustion.
F. Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and equipment.
G. Adjust initial temperature set points.
H. Set field-adjustable switches and circuit-breaker trip ranges as indicated.
I. Occupancy Adjustments: When requested within 12 months of date of substantial completion, provide on-site
assistance in adjusting system to suit actual occupied conditions. Provide up to two visits to site outside normal
occupancy hours for this purpose, without additional cost.
J. Prepare written report that documents testing procedures and results.

SECTION 23 52 23
CAST-IRON BOILERS
PART 1 DESIGN REQUIREMENTS

1.01 REFERENCES
A. AGA - Directory of Certified Appliances and Accessories.
B. AGA Z21.13 - Gas-Fired Low-Pressure Hot Water Boilers.
C. ASME Section IV - Boiler and Pressure Vessel Codes - Rules for Construction of Heating Boilers.
D. ASME Section VIII, Div 1 - Boiler and Pressure Vessel Codes - Rules for Construction of Pressure Vessels.
E. NEMA 250 - Enclosures for Electrical Equipment (1000 Volts Maximum).
F. NFPA 54 (AGA Z223.1) - National Fuel Gas Code.
G. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code.
H. IRI - Industrial Risk Insurers - Fuel Gas Safety Requirements.
1.02 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS
A. Conform to NFPA 70 code for internal wiring of factory wired equipment.
B. Conform to ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code Section IV for construction of heating boilers.
C. Units: AGA certified.
D. Products Requiring Electrical Connection: Listed and classified by Underwriters' Laboratories, Inc.
E. Must meet CSDI standards/requirements.
1.03 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data:
4. Provide data indicating general assembly, components, controls, safety controls, and wiring diagrams with
electrical characteristics and connection requirements, and service connections
5. Submit manufacturer's installation instructions. Indicate assembly, support details, connection
requirements, and include start-up instructions.
B. Drawings:
1. Final control or specification drawing.
2. Final assembly or outline drawing and list of parts.
3. Dimensioned drawings.
4. Wiring schematic.
5. Wiring connection diagram or wire list.
C. Quality Assurance Data:
Denver Public Schools – Facility Management 23 52 23 Cast-Iron Boilers

3. Provide appropriate certificates of shop inspection and field assembly inspection as specified by ASME
Code when required.
4. IRI approval application form, where applicable.
5. Manufacturer's field reports: Indicate specified performance and efficiency has been met or exceeded.
Provide combustion test which shall include boiler firing rate, over fire draft, gas flow rate, heat input,
burner manifold gas pressure, percent carbon monoxide (CO), percent oxygen (O), percent excess air, flue
gas temperature at outlet, ambient temperature, net stack temperature, percent stack loss, percent
combustion efficiency, and heat output.
D. Project Record Documents:
1. Shop Drawings:
E. Operation and Maintenance Data:
6. Include manufacturer's descriptive literature, operating instructions, cleaning procedures, replacement parts
list, and maintenance and repair data.
1.04 QUALIFICATIONS
A. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing the products specified in this section with minimum
five years documented experience.
1.05 WARRANTY
A. All equipment provided shall be warranted against defects in workmanship and material for a period of twenty-
four months after start-up and acceptance of the operation of the boiler by the owner. All defective material
shall be replaced with no charge to the owner. Labor for replacement of defective parts shall be provided by the
manufacturer. Warranty does not cover any parts replacement due to damage in shipment, exposure to weather
or improper installation.
1.06 COMMISSIONING
A. Factory start-up and commissioning shall be required. The factory start-up representative shall be responsible
for all commissioning through the project turn-over to DPS. Field modifications and adjustments shall be made
by a factory trained representative, not the installation contractor.
PART 2 DESIGN REQUIREMENTS
2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS
A. Steam Boilers:
1. Burnham
2. Weil-Mclain
B. Burners:
1. Riello

C. Controls: Siemens LMV5/linkageless burner controls.
2.02 GENERAL BOILER REQUIREMENTS
A. The boiler(s) shall be of a low pressure, cast iron, wet base forced draft design and shall be tested and rated in
accordance with the current edition of The Hydronics Institute Division of GAMA “Testing and Rating
Standard for Heating Boilers”. Atmospheric boilers shall be allowed only where space limitation preclude the
use of multiple force draft boilers.
B. The boiler(s) shall be listed in the I=B=R Ratings Directory and shall be capable of developing full I=B=R
listed output at 100 percent firing rate, and shall bear the I=B=R Emblem.
C. The boiler(s) shall be constructed in accordance with the provisions of the ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel
Code and shall be stamped with the required ASME symbol.
D. Each boiler section shall be hydrostatically pressure tested for one and a half times greater than its working
pressure.
E. The boiler(s) shall be factory assembled where conditions allow. If field conditions do not allow factory
assembled boiler(s), the boiler(s) shall be field assembled and hydrostatically tested in accordance with the
manufacturer’s installation instructions. All work shall be completed in a neat and workmanlike manner.
2.03 BOILER CONSTRUCTION FEATURES
A. The boiler sections shall be assembled using individual draw rods between each section for ease of assembly
and to evenly distribute tension between the sections.
B. The boiler shall be a complete unit with all required parts to operate gas train, controls, etc.
C. The boiler shall comply with State and City codes.
D. Each section shall be evenly spaced with spacing pads and high temperature sealing rope shall be used to
provide a permanent gas-tight seal between the sections.
E. The boiler(s) sections shall be of a wet base design to provide a complete water backed heating surface around
the combustion chamber area for maximum heat transfer and low floor temperatures.
F. The boiler(s) shall be furnished with top and front cleanout plates for ease of inspection and cleaning of the
flueways. The cleanout plates shall be sealed to the boiler with high temperature gaskets and/or high
temperature sealing rope.
G. The boiler(s) shall be furnished with an integral cast iron flue collector and a cast iron flue outlet.
H. The boiler(s) shall be provided with a fibrous ceramic refractory chamber liner and target wall to protect the
base of the firebox and the back section. Chamber liner shall be secured in a factory approved manner to the
firebox to prevent movement of liner during start-up. Liner shall be 8lbs, density and two (2) inches thick.
I. The boiler(s) shall be provided with an insulated burner mounting plate with the necessary tappings for
mounting the burner(s).
J. The boiler(s) shall be provided with pyrex glass front and rear flame observation ports to permit visual
inspection of the burner flame.
K. The boiler(s) shall be provided with an insulated steel flush jacket with a painted finish. The jacket shall be
designed to permit installation after the supply and return piping is connected.
L. The boiler(s) shall be furnished with steel channel rails to provide a level and smooth surface for ease of
assembly.
2.04 INSPECTION TAPPINGS
A. Boiler(s) shall have inspection tappings as specified per manufacturer.
2.05 BOILER TRIM AND CONTROLS
A. The boiler(s) shall be provided with a safety valve set to relieve at 15 PSIG. The valve shall conform to Section
IV of the ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code.

B. The boiler(s) shall be provided with a vacuum-PSI steam gauge to indicate boiler pressure. Steam gauges shall
be 6” diameter minimum.
C. The boiler(s) shall be provided with a 157S low water cut off with gauge cocks. Water gauges shall include a
sight glass with a red background. Provide tri-cocks on sight glass(es) as required by the DPS standards.
D. The boiler(s) shall be provided with an operating pressure control and a manual reset high limit pressure
control.
1. Model #L404f1060/L4079B 1033 MR.
E. The boiler(s) shall be provided with a float type and probe type low water cut-off with manual reset.
F. Provide manual bypass switch on the boiler control panel such that the boiler(s) can be manually operated
independent of the building automation system.
G. Provide and install a Killam model 1-1/4 GFLD flow-meter with a ball valve for shut off or approved equal.
The flow-meter shall act as a gas leak detection gauge and shall be installed between the two gas valves on the
gas train.
H. Make-up water feed valves shall be fast acting valves manufactured by ASCO. End switches shall not be
installed. Each boiler shall be provided with an independent make-up water valve. In addition to the automatic
fill valve, a manual fill shall be installed down stream of the automatic valve.
I. Provide and install a steam trap on all Hartford loops.
J. Provide and install a pressure sensor on the main steam supply header. The pressure switch shall be utilized to
control the boiler heating stages. Staging of the boilers shall be capable of changing the order of the lead/lag
boilers.
K. The boilers shall be equipped with a low fire hold controller installed in the boiler control sequence of
operation. High fire should not be utilized until the boiler temperature reaches a minimum of 160 degrees.
2.06 DRAFT CONTROL DAMPER AS NEEDED PER JOB
A. An automatic draft control system shall be installed in all steam boiler systems. Barometric shall not be
allowed. The drafter control system shall be engineered to insure that the flue system is properly drafting.
Draft control system shall include dampers and fans as required to accomplish the desired operating condition.
2.07 GAS BURNERS
A. General Requirements:
1. Furnish and install Underwriters’ Labeled gas burners. The burner design, construction, components and
installation shall meet all applicable code requirements.
2. Provide mounting plate constructed with high temperature castable insulation refractory, 1” thick 1900
degree F insulating block, 2-inch IPS site glass to observe flame, and all necessary 304SS anchor bolts
sized for boiler furnace diameter.
B. General Burner Description:
1. The burners shall be forced draft flame retention model. Each burner shall be capable of burning 1000
BTU/Cu. Ft. natural gas (840 BTU/CF @ 5,200 ft. elevation), with a specific gravity of approximately 0.65
to provide the capacity rating of the existing burner to be replaced. Project Altitude is approximately 5,280
Ft above sea level.
2. Gas pressure applied to the burner gas train supply connection shall be a minimum of 18 In. W.C., 7-11”
W.G. for natural draft, or 14” W.G. for forced draft.
C. Approval Codes:
1. Each burner shall be listed by Underwriters Laboratories and shall bear the appropriate U.L. label (in
addition to the U.L. requirements, all equipment and installation procedures will meet the requirements of
IRI codes.

a) Siemens LMV51 linkage less Burner Control System.
b) Remote mounted burner control panel with main power disconnect switch.
c) Burner On/Off switch.
d) Alarm horn/bell with silencing switch.
e) Bacnet MSTP communications.
f) Control circuit transformer (fused).
g) Enable/Disable, General Fault, EPO, CAD terminals.
h) UL/FM/CSD-1 compliant.
i) Dual block pilot gas train.
j) Valve proving function with factory installed gas pressure switch.
k) Dual POC switches within FM gas train.
l) Temperature sensor for low fire hold (low fire hold to be performed by the Siemens LMV51-not an
aquastat).
m) Indicator lights for pilot on, low water, high limit, main gas on, power, call for heat.
n) QRI flame scanner.
o) 0-10vdc steam pressure transducer.
p) Remote/local switch.
q) 4-20ma remote modulation capable.
r) Siemens SKP15/SKP25 VG series gas valves with regulator.
s) Human interface.
D. Combustion Head Design:
1. Each burner shall be of welded steel construction. The combustion head shall incorporate a multi blade,
stainless steel, flame retention diffuser. The gas firing head shall be of the multi-port type and constructed
such as to place annular gas distribution opening between two parallel air flow streams to achieve
maximum fuel/air mixing. Burners with cast alloy blower housings will not be accepted.
2. All air required for combustion shall be supplied by a blower mounted integral to the burner. The blower
wheel shall be of the forward curved centrifugal design and shall be directly driven by 208 volt or 460 volt
(as indicated on drawings and per DPS Section 15170), 60 Hertz 3 phase motor.
E. Ignition Systems:
1. The burner ignition system which will light the main gas flame and shall utilize natural gas as the fuel
source. The gas pilot system components shall include spark ignited pilot assembly, ignition transformer,
pilot solenoid valve, pilot gas pressure regulator (Maxitrol 325-3 or equivalent) and manual gas ball valve
shutoff cock. The flame proving system shall incorporate a Fireye Ultra-Violet flame detector which will
monitor both the pilot and main flames. The pilot assembly shall fit within the confines of the blast tube -
avoiding special burner front plate pilot cut outs.
F. Fuel/Air Control System:
1. Modulation - The main on-off gas supply shall be controlled by a motorized gas valve. A modulating
motor shall control the modulated positioning of the draft dampers, butterfly type gas proportioning valve
to best meet varying system load conditions.
G. Gas Control Train:
1. U.L. Requirements

2. The gas valve train shall contain the following:
a) (2) Manually lubricated shutoff valves.
b) Main gas pressure regulator: Maxitrol 210E – 100 percent lockup.
c) Manual reset high gas pressure switch: match existing or if new, Honeywell 0437D-1005 or similar.
d) Pressure tap on gas line upstream of main gas regulator.
e) Manual UL listed leak test cock.
H. Burner Operating Controls:
1. Steam Boiler:
a) The on-off operation of the burner shall be controlled by a pressure control. System pressure shall be
controllable from 5-15 psig - adjustable. Refer to drawings for setpoint.
b) A safety manual reset type limit control shall be provided to shut the burner down in the event of
excessive pressure.
I. Control Panel:
1. Appropriate electrical knockouts shall be provided on both sides of the panel to allow for necessary power
and limit control wiring. The control panel shall be constructed of 16 gauge steel and shall be complete
with a top switch and control section which shall be hinged to allow for full access to all panel mounted
components. The control panel shall be painted in a color and finish identical to the burner being supplied.
2. The control panel shall include a control circuit transformer fused on both the primary and secondary
windings - flame safeguard control as specified above - on-off switch - gas/oil selector switch - motor
starters, relays, terminal blocks and other electrical devices as required.
3. Control Panel Options:
a) The control panel shall also include an alarm bell with automatic reset silencing switch. The bell shall
ring on flame failure or low water condition.
b) Relay for DDC interface to allow for run enable signal from the building management system.
4. Control drawing shall be posted in the control panel.
5. Burner start up and test data form shall be posted in the control panel.
6. Provide manual bypass switch on the boiler control panel such that the boiler(s) can be manually operated
independent of the building automation system.
7. The vent lines from the gas regulators shall be installed with steel piping. Soft copper or aluminum tubing
shall not be installed.
8. Power disconnect switch to the boiler control panel shall be mounted on the side of the panel.
J. Product Liability Insurance:
1. The burner manufacturer will provide an insurance certificate documenting current coverage of product
liability insurance.
K. Burner Start Up Information and Test Data:
1. On completion of the burner system start up – the burner manufacturer will complete the “Burner Start Up
Information and Test Data” form.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 BURNER INSTALLATION
A. General:

1. Install burners and components in accordance with manufacturer’s installation instructions, state and local
code requirements, and local utility company requirements.
2. Maintain manufacturer recommended clearances.
3. Coordinate the installation of the burners and associated components with the building owner.
4. If there is a multiple boiler installation, only one boiler shall be taken out of service at a time unless
approved by DPS.
B. Electrical Work:
1. All wiring to be stranded.
2. Furnish a copy of manufacturer’s wiring diagram submittal to Electrical Installer.
3. Verify that electrical installation is in accordance with manufacturer’s submittal.
4. Do not proceed with startup until electrical work is acceptable to burner equipment manufacturer.
3.02 MANUFACTURER'S FIELD SERVICES
A. Prepare and start systems under provisions of Division 23.
B. Provide field representative for starting unit, training operator, and testing unit.
3.03 START-UP INFORMATION AND TEST DATA FORM
A. See burner start-up information and test data form.
3.04 BOILER INSTALLATION
A. Boilers shall have start-up, testing, adjusting, instruction of owners operating personnel and 90 days free service
by factory-authorized service representative start-up personnel who are on 24 hour call.
B. Perform installation and startup checks according to manufacturer’s written instructions.
C. Leak Test: Hydrostatic test. Repair leaks and retest until no leaks exists. Each boiler section shall be one and a
half times greater than its working pressure.
D. Operational Test: Start units to confirm proper motor rotation and unit operation. Adjust air-fuel ratio and
combustion
E. Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and equipment.
F. Adjust temperature initial set points.
G. Set field-adjustable switches and circuit breaker trip ranges as indicated
H. Occupancy Adjustments: When requested within 24 months of date of substantial completion, provide on-site
I. Prepare written report that documents testing procedures and results.
J. All conduits shall be supported above the floor. No conduits shall be on the floor.
K. Provide and install pigtails on all gauges.
L. The boiler relief valve(s) and low water cut-off (s) shall drain to the nearest floor drain.
M. Provide and install eccentric fittings on the drains from the boiler(s). Concentric fittings shall not be installed.
Boiler drains, LWCO, steam skimmers and the like, from the boiler shall be piped to the nearest floor drain.
N. The vent lines from the gas regulators shall be installed with steel piping. Soft copper or aluminum tubing shall
not be installed.Unions shall be installed within 12 inches of each appliance for ease of removal.
O. Pilot piping for power burners shall be hard piped with steel piping, soft metal such as aluminum shall not be
accepted.

3.05 BOILER FOUNDATION
A. A concrete housekeeping pad shall be provided. Housekeeping pads shall be constructed to provide a level and
structurally sound support for the boiler(s) with steel skids for boiler to sit on.
A. Site Tests.
B. Inspection.
C. Manufacturer’s Field Services.
3.07 DEMONSTRATION
A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train owner’s maintenance personnel and custodial staff to
adjust, operate, and maintain boilers. Provide a minimum of four (4) hours of on-site training with instruction
manuals and procedures.
Please coordinate with Mechanical QAQC to received reference sheet.

BURNER START-UP AND TEST DATA FORM
The following information should be filled in by the burner manufacturer at start-up or after any adjustment to the burner. A
copy of the Start-up Report MUST be returned to the Owner or Owners Representative.
Burner Model Serial Number ____________ Start-up Date _____________
Burner Manufacturer_______________ Start Up Contractors Name ___________________________
Name of Technician Performing Start up _________________________________
TEST GAS OIL

CONDUCTED LOW 50% HIGH LOW 50% HIGH
Firing Rate
Stack Temp (Gross)
F
O2%
CO2%
CO (PPM)
NOx (PPM)
Smoke (Bacharach)
Combustion Eff%
Stack Draft
Furnace Pressure
Blast Tube Pressure
Steam Pressure
Water Temperature
Supply Oil Pressure
Return Oil Pressure
Oil Temperature
Atom, Air Pressure
Gas Pressure @
Regulator Inlet
Gas Pressure @
Burner Manifold
PILOT GAS PRESSURE @ REGULATOR OUTLET

Flame Signal Pilot
Flame Signal
Main
Ambient
Temperature F

AMBIENT TEMPERATURE F
ELECTRIC VOLTAGE AMPERAGE
MOTORS L1 L2 L3 L1 L2 L3
Control Voltage
Blower Motor
Air Compressor
Air-Oil or
Metering
CONTROL SET
CHECKS TEST POINT
Low Water C.O.
Aux. LWCO
Low Water Alarm
High Water Alarm
Operating Limit
High Limit
Operating Control
Stack Temp
Interlock
Flame Failure
Combustion Air
Switch
High Purge
Switch
Low Fire Interlock
Oil Pressure
Switch
Oil Valve P.O.C.
Interlock
Atomizing Air
Switch
High Gas Pressure
Switch
Low Gas Pressure
Switch
Gas Valve P.O.C.
Interlock
FOR LOW NOX BURNERS

Blast Tube Temp.
Interlock
FGR Line Purge
Switch
FGR Valve P.O.C.
Switch


SECTION 23 57 00
HEAT EXCHANGERS FOR HVAC
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data:
1. Heat Exchangers, Condensate Coolers, Flat-Plate Heat Exchangers.
B. Quality Assurance Data: {the following are suggestions; include what is necessary}
1. Conform to Sections 8D of the ANSI/ASME Boilers and Pressure Vessels Code for manufacture of tubular
heat exchangers and heat exchanger shells.
1. Shop Drawings:
a) Certified plan view drawings with dimensions.
b) Wiring and termination drawings.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 SHELL AND TUBE-TYPE HEAT EXCHANGERS
1. Ace Heating Solutions, LLC
2. Armstrong
3. Bell and Gossett
4. Patterson-Kelley
5. Taco
B. Configuration: Two pass, U-tube.
C. Shell and Head Materials: steel shell and cast-iron head.
D. Tube and Tube Sheet Materials: seamless, 3/4-inch OD copper tubes with steel tube sheets.
E. Heat exchanger rating: ASME “U” symbol for unfired pressure vessels.
F. Shell shall include a valved drain.
2.02 CONDENSATE COOLERS
1. Ace Heating Solutions, LLC
2. Armstrong
Denver Public Schools – Facility Management 23 57 00 Heat Exchangers for HVAC

3. Bell and Gossett
4. Patterson-Kelley
5. Taco
B. Condensate Cooler is a device that mixes hot condensate or hot water with a cold water supply to reduce the
temperature to acceptable discharge drain temperatures as required by city and state codes. It is a pre-assembled
package that is suitable for any plumbing system. When hot condensate or hot water is drained into the
condensate cooler body, the tempering valve opens and allows cold water to enter the chamber and mix with
hotter liquid, cooling it to a preset temperature level of 135°F (57°C) or to a desired field set temperature.
2.03 PLATE HEAT EXCHANGERS:
1. Alfa Laval Thermal, Inc.
2. APV SPX
3. Armstrong Fluid Handling; Div. of Armstrong International, Inc.
4. Kelvion, Inc.
5. Bell & Gossett, a xylem brand
6. Mueller: Paul Mueller Co.
7. Tranter, Inc.; Texas Div.
8. Triangle Tube/Phase III Co., Inc.
B. Configuration: Freestanding assembly consisting of frame support, fixed and movable end plates, tie rods,
plates, and one-piece gaskets.
C. End-Plate Material: Painted carbon steel with steel tie-rods.
D. Gasket Material: EPDM.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION
A. Shell and Tube Heat Exchangers:
1. Install shell-and-tube heat exchangers on saddle supports with provisions to drain shell.
2. In steam supply to shell, provide in-line an isolation valve, strainer, union, automatic control valve, union,
and isolation valve with a globe valve bypass around assembly. Provide a plugged or capped valve at
strainer for blow down. Consult with DPS regarding the option of using pressure and temperature-rated ball
or butterfly valves for this application.
3. In condensate return from shell, provide drip leg, strainer, union, steam trap, union, test tee, check valve and
ball valve.
4. At hot water outlet, provide ASME-rated pressure relief valve. Pipe the relief valve discharge to the floor
drain.
5. Provide pressure gages and thermometers at water inlets and outlets, and compound pressure/vacuum
gauges at inlet and outlet of steam control valve.
6. Provide heat exchanger piping with isolation valves and unions or flanges at all unit connections, to allow
for both the removal of entire unit and for tube pull without dismantling the connected piping. Locate heat
exchanger so adjacent equipment does not interfere with exchanger’s tube pull.
7. Provide a vacuum breaker, steam air vent, and a compound pressure/vacuum gauge with pigtail siphon, to
be installed at factory-provided tappings in shell.
B. Train DPS maintenance personnel on procedures and schedules for starting and stopping, troubleshooting,
servicing, and maintaining heat exchangers.
Denver Public Schools – Facility Management 23 57 00 Heat Exchangers for HVAC

SECTION 23 62 00
PACKAGED COMPRESSOR AND CONDENSER UNIT
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 COMPLIANCE
A. Comply with Colorado Department of Health Regulation 15 and all applicable EPA rules and regulations
regarding the purchase, disposal and handling of refrigerants.
1.02 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data:
a) Include mounting information.
a) Include unit capacity, entering and leaving water temperatures, ambient air temperature, electrical
connection requirements, clearances, unit weight.
1. Shop Drawings:
1.03 WARRANTY
A. Provide compressor warranty information.
1.04 COMMISSIONING
A. Require that a factory representative be employed for start-up of chiller.
1.05 COMPRESSOR REQUIREMENTS
A. Compressors Over 100 ton Capacity:
1. Motors and Starters:
a) Dual winding, wye-delta design with matching two-step, closed transition, time-delay starting
switchgear is preferred. (An auxiliary timer in the starting circuit is required.)
b) Specify that timer be set to limit starts to a minimum of 30 minutes apart, or greater as recommended
by the manufacturer.
c) An auto-transformer with reduced voltage start is an acceptable alternate starter.
Denver Public Schools – Facility Management 23 62 00 Packaged Compressor and Condenser Units
d) All motors shall have heat sensors in the windings for thermal protection.
2. Full-running Protection:
a) Specify compressors equipped with high- and low-pressure safety cutouts, external overload protection,
inherent thermal protection, and low oil pressure.
b) Manual reset-type safeties which cause an electrical lock-out of the starting circuit when it has tripped,
with an indication of which safety device has operated.
3. Gauges and Lubrication:
a) Compressor package to include gauges indicating high side, low side and oil pressures. Not required if
unit is equipped with microprocessor control that shows pressure at control panel.
b) Forced-feed lubrication system with filter, cooler and visual inspection port in the oil reservoir.
4. Heaters:
a) Specify crankcase heaters wired on a separate electrical circuit.
b) Specify oil pump starter wired on a separate electrical circuit.
5. Refrigerant Transfer:
a) Unit should have provisions for pump out/down into unit-mounted receiver if application warrants it.
(DPS authorization is required for exception).
6. Pressure Relief:
a) Show on drawings safety valve pressure relief piping vented to outdoors in accordance with
ANSI/ASHRAE Standard 15-78. Pressure relief valves shall be self-closing, resealing type.
7. Hail Guards:
a) Specify hail guards to protect exposed coils in unit (DPS authorization required for exception).
B. Compressors of 60 to 100 ton Capacity:
1. Semi-hermetic, reciprocating-type, helical rotor or scroll.
2. Full running protection as described for larger compressors.
3. Suction, discharge and oil pressure gauges.
4. Crankcase heaters.
5. Oil reservoir sight glass.
6. Replaceable refrigerant filter dryers in liquid line.
7. Hydraulic capacity control by cylinder unloading for adjustments to load fluctuations.
8. Positive unloaded start.
9. An adequate discharge muffler.
10. Internal vibration isolation to provide minimum vibration transmission.
11. Closed-transition starting switchgear, determined by the electrical requirements for the particular sizes of
motors. Part-winding start is acceptable.
12. As described on larger air-cooled units, specify a receiver on the condenser and provisions for pumping the
full refrigerant charge into the receiver. If condenser will hold the full charge, this is an acceptable
alternative.
13. Extended five (5) year warranty on compressor(s).
C. Compressors under 60 but over 15 ton Capacity:
1. Hermetic or semi-hermetic reciprocating, scroll or helical rotor.
2. Inherent thermal overload protection for motors.
6. Replaceable refrigerant filter-dryers.
7. Hydraulic capacity control by cylinder unloading or staging of multiple compressors.
9. Adequate discharge muffler.
10. Internal vibration isolation.
11. Closed-transition starting switchgear determined by the electrical requirements for the particular sizes of
motors.
12. A receiver on the condensers and provisions for pumping the full refrigerant charge into the receiver. If
condenser will hold the full charge, this is an acceptable alternative.
D. Compressors between 7-½ and 15 ton Capacity:
1. Same requirements as 15 to 60 ton compressors, except that cylinder unloading and unloaded start features
are not required on these units.
E. Compressors below 7-½ tons Capacity:
1. Same requirements as 7-½ to 15 ton compressors, except that gauges are not required.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 RECIPROCATING COMPRESSORS (HERMETIC)
1. Bristol
2. Carrier
3. Copeland
4. Tecumseh
5. Trane
6. York
B. Unit performance certified in accordance with latest edition of ARI Standard 520.
C. Unit construction in accordance with ANSI B9.1 Safety Code.
D. Factory-wired control panel in accordance with NEC.
2.02 RECIPROCATING COMPRESSORS (OPEN DRIVE)
1. McQuay
2. Carrier
3. Trane
4. York
2.03 WATER-COOLED CONDENSING PACKAGED UNITS
1. Carrier
2. McQuay
3. Trane
4. York
C. Unit construction in accordance with ANSI B9.1 Safety Code and ASME Code.
E. Connect to Integrated Building Automation System. Refer to Section 25 50 00 – Integrated Building
2.04 WATER-COOLED RECIPROCATING CHILLER (REMOTE CONDENSER)
1. Carrier
2. Trane
3. York
4. McQuay
F. Units UL-listed and CSA certified.
2.05 WATER-COOLED CONDENSERS
1. Carrier
2. Trane
3. York
4. McQuay
2.06 VALVES
A. Isolation valves shall be provided by manufacturer in order to allow servicing of major refrigerant components
(e.g., compressor, receiver, condenser, filter-dryer, expansion valve) with no loss of refrigerant; the filter dryer
shall have a three-valve arrangement with bypass.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 DEMOLITION:
A. All refrigerant be removed, recovered and reclaimed prior to demolition of any equipment containing
refrigerant, such as rooftop units, split-system condensing units, air conditioning units and chillers. Specify that
Contractor notifies DPS HVAC shop supervisor prior to commencing demolition work. DPS personnel will
either remove refrigerant from equipment or direct contractor to remove refrigerant. All handling of refrigerant
will be by certified refrigeration technicians, approved by the U.S. EPA.
3.02 INSTALLATION
A. Chillers:
1. Install water chillers on concrete base. Concrete materials and installation requirements are specified in
Division 3.
2. Vibration Isolation: Mount water chiller on vibration isolation equipment base as specified in Specification
Section 15240 Mechanical Sound and Vibration Control.
3. Maintain manufacturer's recommended clearances for service and maintenance.
4. Charge water chiller with refrigerant if not factory charged.
5. Install separate devices furnished by manufacturer.
B. Condensers:
1. Select air-cooled condensers with sufficient capacity to compensate for altitude deration of 5,400 feet and
105F inlet air temperature.
2. Vertical blow-type condenser fans shall not be specified for systems that are operated during winter.
3. A horizontal blow with a weather-protecting shroud designed to prevent possible blade icing and unbalance
during cold weather is required.
4. Orient fans to discharge eastward where practicable.
3.03 STARTUP SERVICE
A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to perform startup service.
B. Inspect field-assembled components, equipment installation, and piping and electrical connections for proper
assemblies, installations, and connections.
C. Complete installation and startup checks according to manufacturer's written instructions and perform the
following:
1. Verify that refrigerant charge is sufficient and water chiller has been leak tested.
2. Verify that pumps are installed and functional.
3. Verify that thermometers and gages are installed.
4. Operate water chiller for run-in period according to manufacturer's written instructions.
5. Check bearing lubrication and oil levels.
6. Verify that refrigerant pressure relief is vented outside (for water-cooled water chillers).
7. Verify proper motor rotation.
8. Verify static deflection of vibration isolators, including deflection during water chiller startup and
shutdown.
9. Verify and record performance of water chiller protection devices.
10. Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged or malfunctioning controls and equipment.
D. Prepare a written startup report that records results of tests and inspections.
E. Occupancy Adjustments: when requested within 12 months of date of Substantial Completion, provide on-site
occupancy hours for this purpose.
1. Label the amount of refrigerant in the system in pounds, on each piece of equipment.
3.04 DEMONSTRATION
A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train owner's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate,
and maintain cooling towers. Refer to Division 1 Section Demonstration and Training.
SECTION 23 63 13
AIR COOLED REFRIGERANT CONDENSERS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 COMPLIANCE
1.02 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data:
1. Shop Drawings:
1.03 WARRANTY
1.04 COMMISSIONING
Denver Public Schools – Facility Management 23 63 13 Air-Cooled Refrigerant Condensers

4. Heaters:
6. Pressure Relief:
7. Hail Guards:
a) Specify hail guards to protect exposed coils in unit (DPS and DPS HVAC Supervisor authorization
required for exception).
B. Compressors of 60 to 100 ton Capacity:
1. Semi-hermetic, reciprocating-type, helical rotor or scroll.
2. Full running protection as described for larger compressors.
6. Replaceable refrigerant filter dryers in liquid line.
7. Hydraulic capacity control by cylinder unloading for adjustments to load fluctuations.
9. An adequate discharge muffler.
10. Internal vibration isolation to provide minimum vibration transmission.
11. Closed-transition starting switchgear, determined by the electrical requirements for the particular sizes of
motors. Part-winding start is acceptable.
12. As described on larger air-cooled units, specify a receiver on the condenser and provisions for pumping the
full refrigerant charge into the receiver. If condenser will hold the full charge, this is an acceptable
alternative.
C. Compressors under 60 but over 15 ton Capacity:
1. Hermetic or semi-hermetic reciprocating, scroll or helical rotor.
2. Inherent thermal overload protection for motors.

6. Replaceable refrigerant filter-dryers.
7. Hydraulic capacity control by cylinder unloading or staging of multiple compressors.
9. Adequate discharge muffler.
10. Internal vibration isolation.
11. Closed-transition starting switchgear determined by the electrical requirements for the particular sizes of
motors.
12. A receiver on the condensers and provisions for pumping the full refrigerant charge into the receiver. If
condenser will hold the full charge, this is an acceptable alternative.
D. Compressors between 7-½ and 15 ton Capacity:
1. Same requirements as 15 to 60 ton compressors, except that cylinder unloading and unloaded start features
are not required on these units.
E. Compressors below 7-½ tons Capacity:
1. Same requirements as 7-½ to 15 ton compressors, except that gauges are not required.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 AIR-COOLED CONDENSING UNITS
1. Submit recommendation.
B. Unit performance certified in accordance with latest edition of ARI Standards 210 and 270.
E. Connect to Integrated Building Automation System. Refer to Section 25 50 00 – Intelligent Building
2.02 AIR-COOLED CONDENSERS
1. Submit recommendations.
B. Unit performance certified in accordance with latest edition ARI Standard 460.
C. Unit construction in accordance with ANSI B9.1 Safety Code.
E. Connect to Integrated Building Automation System. Refer to Section 25 50 00 – Intelligent Building
F. Units UL-listed and CSA certified.
G. In units with multiple fans, isolate each fan section.
2.03 VALVES

PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 DEMOLITION
3.02 INSTALLATION
A. Condensers:
1. Select air-cooled condensers with sufficient capacity to compensate for altitude deration of 5,400 feet and
105F inlet air temperature.
2. Vertical blow-type condenser fans shall not be specified for systems that are operated during winter.
3. A horizontal blow with a weather-protecting shroud designed to prevent possible blade icing and unbalance
during cold weather is required.
4. Orient fans to discharge eastward where practicable.
following:
1. Verify that refrigerant charge is sufficient and water chiller has been leak tested.
4. Operate water chiller for run-in period according to manufacturer's written instructions.
6. Verify that refrigerant pressure relief is vented outside (for water-cooled water chillers).
shutdown.
9. Verify and record performance of water chiller protection devices.
3.04 DEMONSTRATION

SECTION 23 64 16
CENTRIFUGAL WATER CHILLERS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 COMPLIANCE
1.02 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data:
1. Shop Drawings:
1.03 WARRANTY
1.04 COMMISSIONING
Denver Public Schools – Facility Management 23 64 16 Centrifugal Water Chillers

4. Heaters:
6. Pressure Relief:
7. Hail Guards:
a) Specify hail guards to protect exposed coils in unit (DPS and DPS HVAC Supervisor authorization
required for exception).
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 CENTRIFUGAL OR ROTARY-SCREW WATER CHILLER
1. Carrier
2. McQuay (with sound abatement kit)
3. Trane
4. York
B. Chiller performance rated in accordance with latest edition of ARI Standard 550.
C. Factory-wired control panel in accordance with NEC.
D. Connect to Integrated Building Automation System. Refer to 25 50 00 - Intelligent Building Automation
System (IBAS) for interface requirements.
2.02 VALVES
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 DEMOLITION:

3.02 INSTALLATION
A. Chillers:
1. Install water chillers on concrete base. Concrete materials and installation requirements are specified in
Division 3.
2. Vibration Isolation: Mount water chiller on vibration isolation equipment base as specified in Specification
Section 15240 Mechanical Sound and Vibration Control.
4. Charge water chiller with refrigerant if not factory charged.
5. Install separate devices furnished by manufacturer.
following:
a) Verify that refrigerant charge is sufficient and water chiller has been leak tested.
b) Verify that pumps are installed and functional.
c) Verify that thermometers and gages are installed.
d) Operate water chiller for run-in period according to manufacturer's written instructions.
e) Check bearing lubrication and oil levels.
f) Verify that refrigerant pressure relief is vented outside (for water-cooled water chillers).
g) Verify proper motor rotation.
h) Verify static deflection of vibration isolators, including deflection during water chiller startup and
shutdown.
i) Verify and record performance of water chiller protection devices.
j) Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged or malfunctioning controls and equipment.
3.04 DEMONSTRATION

SECTION 23 65 00
COOLING TOWERS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 COMPLIANCE
1.02 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data:
1. Shop Drawings:
1.03 WARRANTY
1.04 COMMISSIONING
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 COOLING TOWER (INDUCED DRAFT, VERTICAL DISCHARGE)
1. Tower-Tech
2. Baltimore Aircoil
3. Evapco
4. Marley
Denver Public Schools – Facility Management 23 65 00 Cooling Towers

5. CCT
B. Capacity rating in accordance with CTI Standards. Include altitude effects.
C. Cooling Towers:
1. Specify the following for induced-draft towers:
a) Fiberglass-reinforced polyester (or equivalent) or galvanized steel throughout.
b) A propeller-type fan, on which blade pitch can be adjusted.
c) A gear reducer drive for anything beyond 10 HP, if applicable.
d) Motors situated outside the tower's humid airstream.
e) Fill manufactured of fire-retardant PVC material (minimum 15 mil. thickness).
f) Hot return water basin covers.
g) Safety railings and ladder to fan deck.
h) Safety cage on ladder.
i) Oversized sump outlet for gravity flow to inside remote sump.
j) Extended lube and oil fill lines with sight glass or dipstick.
k) Stainless steel hardware, and brass or stainless steel fittings, within wet area.
l) Vibration switch.
2.02 COOLING TOWERS (FORCED DRAFT)
1. Tower-Tech
2. Baltimore Aircoil
3. Evapco
4. Marley
5. CCT
B. Provide the following for forced-draft towers:
1. "Baltibond" (Baltimore Air Coil trademark) or equivalent coating.
2. Galvinized steel sump with blow-through prevention kit.
C. If installed indoors, relief dampers shall have stainless steel “knuckles.”
2.03 REMOTE SUMP TANK
A. Furnish and install welded stainless steel or fiberglass sump tank of size and capacity shown on Drawings.
B. Remote sump tank. Incorporate the following requirements in sump tank design:
1. Allow minimum water level of four (4) feet of suction head under operating conditions, or greater if
required to meet NPSH of pump. And provide redundant (stand-by) condenser water pump.
2. Provide a minimum of 150 percent of drain down storage capacity in addition to the above operating level.
3. Drain down capacity to consist of volume of cooling tower water retention plus all piping exposed to freeze
conditions.
4. Design vortex breaker and screen at suction outlet.
5. Provide taps on tank for sump filtration cleaning system.
6. Include inspection ladder on tank to monitor water conditions.
C. Provide adequate ventilation in sump room to control humidity.
2.04 COOLING TOWER SUMP FILTRATION SYSTEM

1. Submit recommendations.
2. For sand-type filtration, consider PEP Model SMF-24.
B. Description: pumped recirculation of water from cooling tower sump or drain down sump through filter and
back to sump as shown on drawings. Include use of distribution piping to sweep floor of tower sump towards
the outlet.
C. Cooling Tower Sump Filtration System:
1. To improve and maintain good water conditions in condenser water, specify and show on drawings a
pumped system to re-circulate water from sump through a filter and back to sump.
2. Sand filters or cyclone filters are preferred, sized to filter entire system volume each hour or at 10 percent of
tower flow rate, whichever is greater. Verify that floor drain can handle flow rate of backwash.
E. Connect to Integrated Building Automation System. Refer to Section 25 50 00 - Intelligent Building
2.05 VALVES
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION
A. Cooling Towers:
1. Install cooling towers on concrete base.
2. Vibration Isolation: Mount water cooling towers on a vibration isolation equipment base as specified in
Specification Section 15240 Mechanical Sound and Vibration Control.
B. Loose Components: Install electrical components, devices, and accessories that are not factory mounted.
C. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to perform startup service.
following:
shutdown.

3.03 DEMONSTRATION

SECTION 23 72 00
AIR-TO-AIR ENERGY RECOVERY EQUIPMENT
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Heat wheels.
2. Packaged energy recovery units.
1.02 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include rated capacities, operating characteristics,
furnished specialties, and accessories.
B. Shop Drawings: For air-to-air energy recovery equipment. Include plans, elevations, sections, details,
and attachments to other work.
1. Detail equipment assemblies and indicate dimensions, weights, loads, required clearances, method
of field assembly, components, and location and size of each field connection.
2. Wiring Diagrams: For power, signal, and control wiring.
C. Field quality-control reports.
D. Operation and Maintenance Data: For air-to-air energy recovery equipment to include in maintenance
manuals.
A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a
qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.
B. ARI Compliance:
1. Capacity ratings for air-to-air energy recovery equipment shall comply with ARI 1060,
"Performance Rating of Air-to-Air Heat Exchangers for Energy Recovery Ventilation
Equipment."
2. Capacity ratings for air coils shall comply with ARI 410, "Forced-Circulation Air- Cooling and
Air-Heating Coils."
C. ASHRAE Compliance:
1. Applicable requirements in ASHRAE 62.1-2004, Section 5 - "Systems and Equipment" and
Section 7 - "Construction and Startup."
2. Capacity ratings for air-to-air energy recovery equipment shall comply with ASHRAE 84,
"Method of Testing Air-to-Air Heat Exchangers."
D. NRCA Compliance: Roof curbs for roof-mounted equipment shall be constructed according to
recommendations of NRCA.
E. UL Compliance:
1. Packaged heat recovery ventilators shall comply with requirements in UL 1812, "Ducted Heat
Recovery Ventilators"; or UL 1815, "Nonducted Heat Recovery Ventilators."
2. Electric coils shall comply with requirements in UL 1995, "Heating and Cooling Equipment."
1.04 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate layout and installation of air-to-air energy recovery equipment and suspension system with
other construction that penetrates ceilings or is supported by them, including light fixtures, HVAC
equipment, fire-suppression system, and partition assemblies.
Denver Public Schools – Facility Management 23 72 00 Air-to-Air Energy Recovery Equipment

B. Coordinate sizes and locations of concrete bases with actual equipment provided.
C. Coordinate sizes and locations of roof curbs, equipment supports, and roof penetrations with actual
equipment provided.
1.05 WARRANTY
A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace
components of air-to-air energy recovery equipment that fail in materials or workmanship within
specified warranty period.
1. Warranty Period for Packaged Energy Recovery Units: Two years.
2. Warranty Period for Fixed-Plate Total Heat Exchangers: 10 years.
A. Furnish extra materials that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for
storage and identified with labels describing contents.
1. Filters: One set(s) of each type of filter specified.
2. Fan Belts: One set(s) of belts for each belt-driven fan in energy recovery units.
3. Wheel Belts: One set(s) of belts for each heat wheel.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 HEAT WHEELS
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:
1. Econovent.
2. Thermotech.
3. SEMCO Incorporated.
B. Casing:
1. Steel with standard factory-painted finish.
2. Integral purge section limiting carryover of exhaust air to between 0.05 percent at 1.6-inch wg and
0.20 percent at 4-inch wg differential pressure.
3. Casing seals on periphery of rotor and on duct divider and purge section.
4. Support vertical rotors on grease-lubricated ball bearings having extended grease fittings or
permanently lubricated bearings. Support horizontal rotors on tapered roller bearing.
C. Rotor: Aluminum segmented wheel strengthened with radial spokes.
D. Drive: Fractional horsepower motor and gear reducer, with speed changed by variable frequency
controller and self-adjusting multilink belt around outside of rotor.
1. Comply with NEMA designation, temperature rating, service factor, enclosure type, and efficiency
requirements for motors specified in Division 23 Section "Common Motor Requirements for
HVAC Equipment."
2. Motor Sizes: Minimum size as indicated. If not indicated, large enough so driven load will not
require motor to operate in service factor range above 1.0.
E. Controls:
1. Starting relay, factory mounted and wired, and manual motor starter for field wiring.
2. Variable frequency controller, factory mounted and wired, permitting input of field connected 4-
20 mA or 1-10-V control signal.

3. Variable frequency controller, factory mounted and wired, with exhaust-air sensor to vary rotor
speed and maintain exhaust temperature above freezing.
4. Variable frequency controller, factory mounted and wired, with exhaust- and outdoor-air sensors,
automatic changeover thermostat and set-point adjuster, to vary rotor speed and maintain air
differential temperature above set point. Rotor speed shall increase to maximum when exhaust-air
temperature is less than outdoor-air temperature.
5. Pilot-Light Indicator: Display rotor rotation and speed.
6. Speed Settings: Adjustable settings for maximum and minimum rotor speed limits.
F. Disposable Panel Filters:
1. Comply with NFPA 90A.
2. Filter Holding Frames: Arranged for flat or angular orientation, with access doors on both sides of
unit. Filters shall be removable from one side or lift out from access plenum.
3. Factory-fabricated, viscous-coated, flat-panel type.
4. Thickness: 2 inches.
5. Minimum Arrestance: 80, according to ASHRAE 52.1.
6. Minimum Merv: 8, according to ASHRAE 52.2.
7. Media: Interlaced glass fibers sprayed with nonflammable adhesive.
8. Frame: Galvanized steel with metal grid on outlet side, steel rod grid on inlet side, hinged, and
with pull and retaining handles.
G. Extended-Surface, Disposable Panel Filters:
3. Factory-fabricated, dry, extended-surface type.
6. Minimum Merv: [8], according to ASHRAE 52.2.
7. Media: Fibrous material formed into deep-V-shaped pleats and held by self-supporting wire grid.
8. Media-Grid Frame: Nonflammable cardboard.
9. Mounting Frames: Welded, galvanized steel with gaskets and fasteners, suitable for bolting
together into built-up filter banks.
H. Extended-Surface, Nonsupported-Media Filters:
3. Factory-fabricated, dry, extended-surface, self-supporting type.
6. Media: Fibrous material constructed so individual pleats are maintained in tapered form by
flexible internal supports under rated-airflow conditions.

7. Filter-Media Frame: Galvanized steel.
together into built-up filter banks with space for prefilter.
2.02 PACKAGED ENERGY RECOVERY UNITS
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:
1. Annexair
2. United Metal Technologies
3. Innovent
B. Surfaces in contact with the airstream shall comply with requirements in ASHRAE 62.1.
C. Housing: Manufacturer's standard construction with corrosion-protection coating and exterior finish,
gasketed and calked weathertight, hinged access doors with neoprene gaskets for inspection and access
to internal parts, minimum 2-inch- thick thermal insulation, knockouts for electrical and piping
connections, exterior drain connection, and lifting lugs.
1. Inlet: Weatherproof hood or louver, with damper for exhaust and supply.
a. Exhaust: Spring-return, two-position, motor-operated damper.
b. Supply: Spring-return, two-position, motor-operated damper.
2. Roof Curb: Refer to Division 07 Section "Roof Accessories" for roof curbs and equipment
supports.
D. Heat Recovery Device: Heat wheel.
E. Supply and Exhaust Fans: Backward-inclined, plenum centrifugal fan with restrained, spring isolators
flexible duct connections.
1. Motor and Drive: Direct driven.
2. Comply with NEMA designation, temperature rating, service factor, enclosure type, and efficiency
requirements for motors specified in Division 23 Section "Common Motor Requirements for
HVAC Equipment."
3. Motor Sizes: Minimum size as indicated. If not indicated, large enough so driven load will not
require motor to operate in service factor range above 1.0.
4. Controllers, Electrical Devices, and Wiring: Comply with requirements for electrical devices and
connections specified in Division 26 Sections.
5. Spring isolators on each fan having 1-inch static deflection.
F. Disposable Panel Filters:
3. Factory-fabricated, viscous-coated, flat-panel type.
8. Frame: Galvanized steel with metal grid on outlet side, steel rod grid on inlet side, hinged, and
with pull and retaining handles.

G. Extended-Surface, Disposable Panel Filters:
3. Factory-fabricated, dry, extended-surface type.
7. Media: Fibrous material formed into deep-V-shaped pleats and held by self-supporting wire grid.
8. Media-Grid Frame: Nonflammable cardboard.
together into built-up filter banks.
H. Extended-Surface, Nonsupported-Media Filters:
5. Media: Fibrous material constructed so individual pleats are maintained in tapered form by
flexible internal supports under rated-airflow conditions.
6. Filter-Media Frame: Galvanized steel.
together into built-up filter banks with space for prefilter.
I. Cooling Coils: Rated according to ARI 410 and ASHRAE 33, and bearing the ARI label.
1. Access: Fabricate coil section to allow removal and replacement of coil and to allow in-place
access for service and maintenance of coil(s).
2. Casing: Stainless steel.
3. Tubes: Copper.
4. Tube Headers: Copper.
5. Fins: Aluminum.
6. Fin and Tube Joint: Mechanical bond.
7. Leak Test: Coils shall be leak tested with air under water.
8. Refrigerant Coils:
a. Capacity Reduction: Circuit coils for interleaved control.
b. Suction and Distributor: Seamless copper tube with brazed joints.
9. Coating: Phenolic epoxy corrosion-protection coating after assembly.
J. Cooling-Coil Condensate Drain Pans:
1. Fabricated from stainless-steel sheet and sloped in multiple planes to collect and drain condensate
from cooling coils, coil piping connections, coil headers, and return bends.

2. Complying with requirements in ASHRAE 62.1-2004.
3. Drain Connections: At low point of pan with minimum threaded nipple.
4. Units with stacked coils shall have an intermediate drain pan to collect and drain condensate from
top coil.
K. Hot-Water Coils: Rated according to ARI 410 and ASHRAE 33, and bearing the ARI label.
1. Access: Fabricate coil section to allow removal and replacement of coil and to allow in-place
access for service and maintenance of coil(s).
2. Casing: Stainless steel.
3. Tubes: Copper.
4. Tube Headers: Copper.
5. Fins: Aluminum.
6. Fin and Tube Joint: Mechanical bond.
7. Leak Test: Coils shall be leak tested with air under water.
8. Coating: Phenolic epoxy corrosion-protection coating after assembly.
L. Indirect-Fired Gas Furnaces:
1. Description: Factory assembled, piped, and wired; complying with NFPA 54, "National Fuel Gas
Code," and ANSI Z21.47, "Gas-Fired Central Furnaces."
a. AGA Approval: Furnace shall bear label of AGA.
2. Burners: Stainless steel.
a. Ignition: Electronically controlled electric spark with flame sensor.
b. High-Altitude Model: For Project at elevations more than 2000 feet above sea level.
3. Heat-Exchanger Drain Pan: Stainless steel.
4. Venting: Gravity vented.
5. Power Vent: Integral, motorized centrifugal fan interlocked with gas valve.
6. Gas Control Valve: Electronic modulating.
7. Gas Train: Single-body, regulated, redundant, 24-V ac gas valve assembly containing pilot
solenoid valve, pilot filter, pressure regulator, pilot shutoff, and manual shutoff. Control devices
and control sequence shall comply with requirements of FMG or IRI.
8. Access: Fabricate section to allow removal and replacement of furnace and to allow in-place
access for service.
M. Piping and Wiring: Fabricate units with space within housing for piping and electrical conduits. Wire
motors and controls so only external connections are required during installation.
1. Indoor Enclosure: NEMA 250, Type 12 enclosure contains relays, starters, and terminal strip.
2. Outdoor Enclosure: NEMA 250, Type 3R enclosure contains relays, starters, and terminal strip.
3. Include nonfused disconnect switches.
4. Variable-speed controller to vary fan capacity from 100 to approximately 50 percent.
N. Accessories:
1. Roof Curb: Aluminum with gasketing, and factory-installed wood nailer; complying with NRCA
standards; minimum height of 14 inches.

2. Intake weather hood with 2-inch- thick filters.
3. Louvered intake weather hood with 2-inch- thick filters in V-bank configuration.
4. Exhaust weather hood with birdscreen.
5. Low-Leakage, Isolation Dampers: Double-skin, airfoil-blade, aluminum extruded-aluminum
dampers with compressible jamb seals and extruded-vinyl blade edge seals, in opposed-blade
arrangement with cadmium-plated steel operating rods rotating in stainless-steel sleeve sintered
bronze or nylon bearings mounted in a single extruded-aluminum frame, with operating rods
connected with a common linkage, and electric damper operator factory wired. Leakage rate shall
not exceed IECC 2015 requirements.
6. Isolation Dampers: Opposed-blade, extruded-aluminum dampers with cadmium-plated steel
operating rods rotating in sintered bronze or nylon bearings mounted in a single extruded-
aluminum frame with operating rods connected with a common linkage, and electric damper
operator factory wired. Blades shall have gaskets and edge seals, and shall be mechanically
fastened to operating rod.
7. Duct flanges.
8. Rubber-in-shear isolators for ceiling-mounted units.
9. Hinged access doors with quarter-turn latches.
10. Drain pans for condensate removal complying with ASHRAE 62.1-2004.
11. Automatic, in-place, spray-wash system.
12. Weatherproofing for tilt-control system.
2.03 CONTROLS
A. Chilled-Water-Cooling-Coils Controls:
1. Factory-mounted sensor in unit discharge with sensor adjustment located in control panel to
modulate factory- coil-control valve to maintain temperature.
B. Refrigerant-Cooling-Coils Controls:
control remote condensing unit to maintain temperature.
2. Cooling Capacity Control: Multiple steps.
C. Hot-Water-Coils Controls:
modulate factory- coil-control valve to maintain temperature.
D. Indirect-Fired-Gas-Furnaces Controls:
control gas furnace burner to maintain temperature.
2. Burner Controls: Modulating.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Examine areas and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation
tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.
B. Examine casing insulation materials and filter media before air-to-air energy recovery equipment
installation. Reject insulation materials and filter media that are wet, moisture damaged, or mold
damaged.

C. Examine roughing-in for electrical services to verify actual locations of connections before installation.
D. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.02 INSTALLATION
A. Install heat wheels so supply and exhaust airstreams flow in opposite directions and rotation is away
from exhaust side to purge section to supply side.
1. Install access doors in both supply and exhaust ducts, both upstream and downstream, for access
to wheel surfaces, drive motor, and seals.
2. Install removable panels or access doors between supply and exhaust ducts on building side for
bypass during startup.
3. Access doors and panels are specified in Division 23 Section "Air Duct Accessories."
B. Install heat-pipe heat exchangers so supply and exhaust airstreams flow in opposite directions. Install
flexible connectors on ducts to enable tilt control; make connections airtight and with slack to
compensate for full tilt.
1. Install heat exchanger with clearance space for heat-pipe coil removal.
2. Install duct access doors in both supply and exhaust ducts, both upstream and downstream, for
access to both sides of heat-pipe coil. Access doors and panels are specified in Division 23
Section "Air Duct Accessories."
3. Install tilt-control components, including electronic controller, electric actuator and linkage,
thermostats, and sensors.
C. Install fixed-plate heat exchangers so supply and exhaust airstreams flow in opposite directions.
1. Install duct access doors in both supply and exhaust ducts, both upstream and downstream, for
access to heat exchanger. Access doors and panels are specified in Division 23 Section "Air Duct
Accessories."
D. Install gas-fired furnaces according to NFPA 54, "National Fuel Gas Code."
E. Install floor-mounted units on 4-inch- high concrete base.
F. Equipment Mounting: Install air-to-air energy recovery equipment on concrete bases. Comply with
requirements for concrete bases specified in Division 03 Section "Cast-in-Place Concrete."
1. Install dowel rods to connect concrete base to concrete floor. Unless otherwise indicated, install
dowel rods on 18-inch centers around the full perimeter of concrete base.
2. For supported equipment, install epoxy-coated anchor bolts that extend through concrete base and
anchor into structural concrete floor.
3. Place and secure anchorage devices. Use setting drawings, templates, diagrams, instructions, and
directions furnished with items to be embedded.
G. Roof Curb: Install on roof structure or concrete base, level and secure, according to The NRCA
"Roofing and Waterproofing Manual - Volume 4: Construction Details - Low-Slope Roofing,"
Illustration "Raised Curb Detail for Rooftop Air Handling Units and Ducts." Or ARI Guideline B.
Install air-to-air energy recovery equipment on curbs and coordinate roof penetrations and flashing
with roof construction specified in Division 07 Section "Roof Accessories." Secure air-to-air energy
recovery equipment to upper curb rail, and secure curb base to roof framing or concrete base with
anchor bolts.
H. Unit Support: Install unit level on structural curbs. Coordinate wall penetrations and flashing with
wall construction. Secure air-to-air energy recovery equipment to structural support with anchor bolts.
I. Suspended Units: Suspend units from structural-steel support frame using threaded steel rods and
spring hangers. Comply with requirements for vibration isolation devices specified in Division 23
Section "Vibration and Seismic Controls for HVAC Piping and Equipment."

J. Install units with clearances for service and maintenance.
K. Install new filters at completion of equipment installation and before testing, adjusting, and balancing.
L. Pipe drains from units and drain pans to nearest floor drain; use ASTM B 88, Type L, drawn-temper
copper water tubing with soldered joints, same size as condensate drain connection.
1. Requirements for Low-Emitting Materials:
a. Use PVC solvent cement that has a VOC content of 510 g/L or less when calculated
according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).
b. Use adhesive primer that has a VOC content of 550 g/L or less when calculated according
to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).
3.03 CONNECTIONS
A. Comply with requirements for piping specified in Division 23 Section "Hydronic Piping." Drawings
indicate general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties.
B. Install piping adjacent to unit to allow service and maintenance.
C. Connect piping to units mounted on vibration isolators with flexible connectors.
D. Connect cooling condensate drain pans with air seal trap at connection to drain pan and install
cleanouts at changes in pipe direction.
E. Hydronic Water Piping: Comply with applicable requirements in Division 23 Section "Hydronic
Piping." Install shutoff valve and union or flange at each coil supply connection. Install balancing
valve and union or flange at each coil return connection.
F. Refrigerant Piping: Comply with applicable requirements in Division 23 Section "Refrigerant Piping."
G. Gas Piping: Comply with requirements in Division 23 Section "Facility Natural-Gas Piping." Connect
gas piping with shutoff valve and union and with sufficient clearance for burner removal and service.
Make connection with AGA-approved flexible connectors.
H. Comply with requirements for ductwork specified in Division 23 Section "Metal Ducts."
I. Indirect-Fired Furnace Vent Connections: Comply with Division 23 Section "Breechings, Chimneys,
and Stacks."
J. Electrical Connections: Comply with applicable requirements in Division 26 Sections.
1. Install electrical devices furnished with units but not factory mounted.
A. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to inspect, test, and
adjust components, assemblies, and equipment installations, including connections.
B. Perform tests and inspections.
1. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to inspect
components, assemblies, and equipment installations, including connections, and to assist in
testing.
C. Tests and Inspections:
1. Operational Test: After electrical circuitry has been energized, start units to confirm proper motor
2. Adjust seals and purge.
3. Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and
equipment.
4. Set initial temperature and humidity set points.

5. Set field-adjustable switches and circuit-breaker trip ranges as indicated.
D. Air-to-air energy recovery equipment will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and
inspections.
E. Prepare test and inspection reports.
3.05 DEMONSTRATION
A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance personnel to adjust,
operate, and maintain air-to-air energy recovery units.

SECTION 23 73 00
INDOOR CENTRAL-STATION AIR-HANDLING UNITS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of modular indoor air-handling unit indicated. Include the following:
1. Certified fan-performance curves with system operating conditions indicated.
2. Certified fan-sound power ratings.
3. Provide maximum sound levels at the discharge, return and from casing.
4. Certified coil-performance ratings with system operating conditions indicated.
5. Motor ratings, electrical characteristics, and motor and fan accessories.
6. Material gauges and finishes.
7. Filters with performance characteristics.
8. Dampers, including housings, linkages, and operators.
B. Shop Drawings: Certified drawings from unit manufacturer.
1. Design Calculations: calculate requirements for selecting vibration isolators and seismic restraints and for
designing vibration isolation bases.
2. Vibration Isolation Base Details: Detail fabrication including anchorages and attachments to structure and
to supported equipment. Include auxiliary motor slides and rails, and base weights.
3. Wiring Diagrams: Power, signal, and control wiring.
C. Manufacturer Seismic Qualification Certification: Submit certification that modular indoor air-handling units,
accessories, and components will withstand seismic forces defined by current code requirements.
A. Source Limitations and Manufacturer's Qualifications: Firms regularly engaged in manufacture of packaged air
handling units with characteristics, sizes, and capacities required, whose products have been in satisfactory use
in similar service for not less than five (5) years. Product Options: drawings indicate size, profiles, and
dimensional requirements of modular indoor air-handling units and are based on the specific system indicated.
B. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, Article 100, by a
testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for intended use.
C. NFPA Compliance: Modular indoor air-handling units and components shall be designed, fabricated, and
installed in compliance with NFPA 90A, "Installation of Air Conditioning and Ventilating Systems." Provide air
handling unit internal insulation having flame spread rating not over 25 and smoke developed rating no higher
than 50.
D. ARI Certification: Modular indoor air-handling units and their components shall be factory tested according to
ARI 430, "Central-Station Air-Handling Units," and shall be listed and labeled by ARI.
E. UL and NEMA Compliance: Provide electrical components required as part of air handling units, which have
been listed and labeled by UL and comply with NEMA Standards.K to installation and electrical connections of
ancillary electrical components of air handling units.
F. ASHRAE Compliance: Construct and install refrigerant coils in accordance with ASHRAE 15, "Safety Code for
Mechanical Refrigeration.”
G. International Energy Conservation Code 2015 compliance.
1.03 COORDINATION
and formwork requirements are specified in Division 3.
Denver Public Schools – Facility Management 23 73 00 Indoor Central-Station Air-Handling Units

B. Coordinate installation of roof curbs, equipment supports, and roof penetrations.
C. Coordinate size and location of structural-steel support members.
1. Filters: One set for each modular indoor air-handling unit.
2. Fan Belts: One set for each modular indoor air-handling unit fan.
3. Gaskets: One set for each access door.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MANUFACTURERS (Specify only those units with similar quality.)
A. Engineered Air
B. Annex Air
C. McQuay
D. Trane
E. York
F. Carrier
2.02 MANUFACTURED UNITS
A. Modular indoor air-handling units shall be factory assembled and consist of fans, motor and drive assembly,
coils, damper, plenums, filters, condensate pans, mixing dampers, control devices, and accessories.
B. Provide air blender in the mixing section of all units.
2.03 CABINET
A. Materials: Formed and reinforced double-wall insulated panels, fabricated to allow removal for access to
internal parts and components, with joints between sections sealed.
1. Outside Casing: Aluminum, 0.063” thick.
2. Inside Casing: Aluminum, 0.032” thick, perforated.
3. Floor Plate: Stainless steel, 0.1406” thick.
B. Cabinet Insulation: Comply with NFPA 90A or NFPA 90B.
1. Materials: ASTM C 1071 with coated surface exposed to airstream to prevent erosion of glass fibers.
3. Thermal Conductivity (k-Value): 0.26 at 75 deg F mean temperature.
4. Fire-Hazard Classification: Maximum flame-spread index of 25 and smoke-developed index of 50, when
tested according to ASTM C 411.
5. Liner Adhesive: Comply with NFPA 90A or NFPA 90B and ASTM C 916.
6. Mechanical Fasteners: Galvanized steel, suitable for adhesive attachment, mechanical attachment, or
welding attachment to duct without damaging liner when applied as recommended by manufacturer and
without causing leakage in cabinet.
7. Location and Application: Factory applied with adhesive and mechanical fasteners to the internal surface of
section panels downstream from and including the cooling coil section.
8. Location and Application: Encased between outside and inside casing.
C. Access Panels and Doors: Same materials and finishes as cabinet, complete with hinges, latches, handles, and
gaskets. Inspection and access panels and doors shall be sized and located to allow periodic maintenance and
inspections. Provide access panels and doors in the following locations:

1. Fan Section: Doors.
2. Access Section: Doors.
3. Coil Section: Inspection panel.
4. Damper Section: Inspection and access panels.
5. Filter Section: Doors to allow periodic removal and installation of filters.
D. Condensate Drain Pans: Formed sections of stainless-steel sheet complying with requirements in
ASHRAE 62.1. Fabricate pans with slopes in two planes to collect condensate from cooling coils (including
coil piping connections and return bends) and humidifiers when units are operating at maximum catalogued face
velocity across cooling coil.
1. Double-Wall Construction: Fill space between walls with foam insulation and seal moisture tight.
2. Drain Connections: Both ends of pan.
3. Pan-Top Surface Coating: Elastomeric compound.
4. Units with stacked coils shall have an intermediate drain pan or drain trough to collect condensate from top
coil.
2.04 FAN SECTION
A. Fan-Section Construction: Belt-driven centrifugal fans consisting of housing, wheel, fan shaft, bearings, motor
and disconnect switch, drive assembly, and support structure and equipped with formed-steel channel base for
integral mounting of fan, motor, and casing panels. Mount fan with vibration isolation.
B. Centrifugal Fan Housings: Formed- and reinforced-steel panels to make curved scroll housings with shaped
cutoff, spun-metal inlet bell, and access doors or panels to allow entry to internal parts and components.
1. Panel Bracing: Steel angle- or channel-iron member supports for mounting and supporting fan scroll,
wheel, motor, and accessories.
2. Performance Class: AMCA 99-2408, Class I, or II, or III.
3. Horizontal Flanged Split Housing: Bolted construction.
4. Plug Fans: With steel cabinet. Fabricate without fan scroll and volute housing.
C. Fan Assemblies: Statically and dynamically balanced and designed for continuous operation at maximum rated
fan speed and motor horsepower.
D. Backward-Inclined Fan Wheels: Steel construction with curved inlet flange, backplate, and backward-inclined
blades welded or riveted to flange and backplate.
E. Forward-Curved Fan Wheels: Black-enamel or galvanized-steel construction with inlet flange, backplate, and
shallow blades with inlet and tip curved forward in direction of airflow and mechanically secured to flange and
backplate; cast-steel hub swaged to backplate and fastened to shaft with set screws.
F. Airfoil-Fan Wheels: Steel construction with smooth-curved inlet flange, heavy backplate, and hollow die-
formed airfoil-shaped blades continuously welded at tip flange and backplate; cast-iron or cast-steel hub riveted
to backplate and fastened to shaft with set screws.
G. Coatings: Hot-dip galvanized or Powder-baked enamel.
H. Shafts: Statically and dynamically balanced and designed for continuous operation at maximum rated fan speed
and motor horsepower, with final alignment and belt adjustment made after installation.
1. Turned, ground, and polished hot-rolled steel with keyway. Ship with a protective coating of lubricating
oil.
2. Designed to operate at no more than 70 percent of first critical speed at top of fan's speed range.
I. Pre-lubricated and Sealed Shaft Bearings: Self-aligning, pillow-block-type ball bearings.
1. Ball-Bearing Rating Life: ABMA 9, L10 of 50,000 hours.
J. Grease-Lubricated Shaft Bearings: Self-aligning, pillow-block-type, tapered roller bearings with double-locking
collars and two-piece, cast-iron housing.

1. Roller-Bearing Rating Life: ABMA 11, L10 of 50,000 hours.
K. Grease-Lubricated Shaft Bearings: Self-aligning, pillow-block-type, ball or roller bearings with adapter mount
and two-piece, cast-iron housing.
1. Ball-Bearing Rating Life: ABMA 9, L10 of 50,000 hours.
2. Roller-Bearing Rating Life: ABMA 11, L10 of 50,000 hours.
L. Belt Drives: Factory mounted, with final alignment and belt adjustment made after installation and with 1.2
service factor based on fan motor.
1. Pulleys: Cast iron or cast steel with split, tapered bushing; dynamically balanced at factory.
2. Motor Pulleys: Adjustable pitch for use with 5-hp motors and smaller; fixed pitch for use with motors
larger than 5 hp. Select pulley so pitch adjustment is at the middle of adjustment range at fan design
conditions.
3. Belts: Oil resistant, nonsparking, and nonstatic; matched for multiple belt drives.
4. Belt Guards: Fabricate to OSHA/SMACNA requirements; 0.1046” thick, ¾” diamond-mesh wire screen
welded to steel angle frame or equivalent; prime coated. Provide belt guards for motors mounted on outside
of cabinet.
M. Motor Mount: Adjustable for belt tensioning.
N. Discharge Dampers: Heavy-duty steel assembly with channel frame and sealed ball bearings, and parallel
blades constructed of two plates formed around and welded to shaft, with blades linked out of airstream to single
control lever.
O. Vibration Control: Install fans on open-spring vibration isolators having a minimum of 1” static deflection and
side snubbers.
P. Fan-Section Source Quality Control:
1. Sound Power Level Ratings: Comply with AMCA 301, "Methods for Calculating Fan Sound Ratings from
Laboratory Test Data." Test fans according to AMCA 300, "Reverberant Room Method for Sound Testing
of Fans." Fans shall bear AMCA-certified sound ratings seal.
2. Factory test fan performance for flow rate, pressure, power, air density, rotation speed, and efficiency.
Establish ratings according to AMCA 210, "Laboratory Methods of Testing Fans for Rating."
2.05 MOTORS
A. General: Refer to Specification Section 26 29 23 for additional requirements.
B. Torque Characteristics: Sufficient to accelerate driven loads satisfactorily.
C. Motor Sizes: Minimum size as indicated. If not indicated, large enough so driven load will not require motor to
operate in service factor range.
D. Temperature Rating: 50 deg C maximum temperature rise at 40OC ambient for continuous duty at full load
(Class A Insulation).
E. Service Factor: 1.15 for polyphase motors and 1.35 for single-phase motors.
F. Motor Construction: NEMA MG 1, general purpose, continuous duty, Design B mounted on adjustable base.
G. Bearings: The following features are required:
1. Ball or roller bearings with inner and outer shaft seals.
2. Grease lubricated.
3. Designed to resist thrust loading where belt or other drives produce lateral or axial thrust in motor.
H. Enclosure Type: The following features are required:
1. Open drip-proof motors if satisfactorily housed or remotely located during operation.
2. Guarded drip-proof motors if exposed to contact with employees or building occupants.

I. Overload Protection: Built-in, automatically resetting, thermal-overload protection.
J. Noise Rating: Quiet.
K. Efficiency: Energy-efficient motors shall have a minimum efficiency as scheduled according to IEEE 112, Test
Method B.
L. Nameplate: Indicate ratings, characteristics, construction, special features, and full identification of
manufacturer.
M. Starters, Electrical Devices, and Wiring: Electrical devices and connections are specified in Division 16
Sections.
2.06 COILS
A. Coil Sections: Common or individual, insulated, galvanized-steel casings for heating and cooling coils. Design
and construct to facilitate removal and replacement of coil for maintenance and to ensure full airflow through
coils. For multizone units, provide air deflectors and air baffles to balance airflow across coils.
B. Water Coils: Continuous circuit self-draining coil fabricated according to ARI 410.
1. Piping Connections: Threaded, on same end.
2. Tubes: Aopper.
3. Fins: Aluminum with fin spacing 0.125”, maximum.
4. Fin and Tube Joint: Silver brazed.
5. Headers: Seamless copper tube with brazed joints, prime coated.
6. Frames: Galvanized-steel channel frame, 0.0625”.
7. Ratings: Design tested and rated according to ASHRAE 33 and ARI 410.
a) Working-Pressure Ratings: 200 psig, 325 deg F.
8. Source Quality Control: Test to 300 psig and to 200 psig underwater.
9. No water on roofs.
C. Steam Coils: Distribution header coil fabricated according to ARI 410, with threaded steam supply and
condensate connections.
1. Connections: Same end.
2. Face-and-Bypass Dampers: Extruded-aluminum blades with full-length drive rod. (USE ONLY WITH
100% OUTSIDE AIR UNITS).
3. Tubes: Copper.
4. Fins: Aluminum with fin spacing 0.125”, maximum.
5. Fin and Tube Joint: silver brazed.
6. Headers: Seamless copper tube with brazed joints, prime coated.
7. Frames: Galvanized-steel channel frame, 0.0625”.
8. Frames: Stainless steel, 0.0625”.
a) Working-Pressure Ratings: 100 psig , 400 deg F.
D. Refrigerant Coils: Coil designed for use with R-22 refrigerant, fabricated according to ARI 410, connected with
brazed fittings.
1. Tubes: Copper.
2. Fins: Aluminum fin spacing 0.125”, maximum.
3. Fin and Tube Joint: Silver brazed.

4. Suction and Distributor: Seamless copper tube with brazed joints.
5. Frames: Galvanized-steel channel frame, .0625”.
a) Working-Pressure Rating: 300 psig.
E. Direct Evaporative Cooling Section:
1. Stainless steel sumps and housings. Stainless steel fasteners within as well as dielectric gaskets between
housing and rest of air handling unit. Provide for water bleed-off.
2. Evaporative cooling section shall be downstream of all coils to avoid mineral build-up due to drifting of
water droplets. Drift eliminators are desired if necessary.
3. Provide P-traps for sump drain. Provide a daily drying-out cycle for evaporative media and weekly sump
drain-down. Provide automatic drain-down when subject to freezing.
4. Provide sump low-water pump cut-off switch in other than residential-size evaporative-cooling systems.
F. Electrical Heating Coils, Controls, and Accessories: comply with UL 1995.
1. Casing Assembly: Slip-in type with galvanized-steel frame.
2. Heating Elements: Coiled resistance wire of 80 percent nickel and 20 percent chromium surrounded by
compacted magnesium-oxide powder in tubular-steel sheath; with spiral-wound, copper-plated, steel fins
continuously brazed to sheath.
3. Overtemperature Protection: Disk-type, automatically resetting, thermal-cutout, safety device; serviceable
through terminal box without removing heater from duct or unit.
a) a. Secondary Protection: Load-carrying, manually resetting or manually replaceable, thermal cutouts;
factory wired in series with each heater stage.
4. Control Panel: Unit mounted with disconnecting means and overcurrent protection. Include the following
controls:
a) Magnetic contactor.
b) Solid-state step-less pulse controller.
c) Toggle switches, one per step.
d) Step controller.
e) Time-delay relay.
f) Pilot lights, one per step.
g) Airflow proving switch.
2.07 DAMPERS
A. General: Leakage rate, according to AMCA 500, "Laboratory Methods for Testing Dampers for Rating," shall
not exceed 2 percent of air quantity at 2000-fpm face velocity through damper and 4” wg pressure differential.
B. Damper Operators: Electric specified in Division 23
C. Low-Leakage, Outside-Air Dampers: Double-skin, airfoil-blade galvanized-steel dampers with compressible
jamb seals and extruded-vinyl blade edge seals, in opposed-blade arrangement with steel operating rods rotating
in stainless-steel sleeve bearings mounted in a single galvanized-steel frame, and with operating rods connected
with a common linkage. Leakage rate shall not exceed 5 cfm/sq. ft. at 1” wg and 9 cfm/sq. ft. at 4” wg.
D. Face-and-Bypass Dampers: Opposed-blade galvanized-steel dampers with steel operating rods rotating in
sintered bronze or nylon bearings mounted in a single galvanized-steel frame and with operating rods connected
with a common linkage. Break-form damper blades, provide gaskets and edge seals, and mechanically fasten to
operating rod.

E. Zone Dampers: Two single-blade galvanized-steel dampers offset 90 degrees from each other on steel operating
rod rotating in sintered bronze or nylon bearings mounted in a single galvanized-steel frame. Break-form
damper blades, provide gaskets and edge seals, and mechanically fasten to operating rod.
F. Mixing Boxes: Parallel-blade galvanized-steel dampers mechanically fastened to steel operating rod in
reinforced, galvanized-steel cabinet. Connect operating rods with common linkage and interconnect linkages so
dampers operate simultaneously.
G. Combination Filter and Mixing Box: Parallel-blade galvanized-steel dampers mechanically fastened to steel
operating rod in reinforced, galvanized-steel cabinet. Connect operating rods with common linkage and
interconnect linkages so dampers operate simultaneously. Cabinet support members shall hold 2” thick, pleated,
flat permanent or throwaway filters. Provide hinged access panels or doors to allow removal of filters from both
sides of unit.
2.08 FILTER SECTION
A. Filters: Comply with NFPA 90A and DPS filter standards as specified in Section 23 40 00 Air Cleaning.
B. Filter Section: Provide filter holding frames arranged for flat or angular orientation, with access doors on both
sides of unit. Filters shall be removable from one side.
C. Disposable Panel Filters: Factory-fabricated, viscous-coated, flat-panel-type, disposable air filters with holding
frames.
2. Frame: Galvanized steel with metal grid on outlet side, steel rod grid on inlet side, hinged, and with pull
and retaining handles.
3. Duct-Mounting Frames: Welded, galvanized steel with gaskets and fasteners, suitable for bolting together
into built-up filter banks.
2.09 UNIT CONTROLS
2. Connect to Integrated Building Automation System. Refer to Section 25 50 00 – Integrated Building
Automation System (IBAS) for interface requirements. Temperature controls are to be provided by section
25 50 00 Controls and connected to Integrated Building Automation System. Refer to Section 25 50 00 –
Integrated Building Automation System (IBAS) for interface requirements.
3. Economizer Fault Detection and Diagnostics (FDD)
a) The following temperature sensors shall be permanently installed to monitor system operation:
i) Outside air.
ii) Supply air.
iii) Return air.
b) Temperature sensors shall have an accuracy of ±2°F over the range of 40°F to 80°F.
c) Refrigerant pressure sensors, where used, shall have an accuracy of ±3 percent of full scale.
d) The unit controller shall be capable of providing system status by indicating the following:
i) Free cooling available.
ii) Economizer enabled.
iii) Compressor enabled.
iv) Heating enabled.
v) Mixed air low limit cycle active.
vi) The current value of each sensor.
e) The unit controller shall be capable of manually initiating each operating mode so that the operation of
compressors, economizers, fans and the heating system can be independently tested and verified.

f) The unit shall be capable of reporting faults to a fault management application accessible by day-to-day
operating or service personnel, or annunciated locally on zone thermostats.
g) The FDD system shall be capable of detecting the following faults:
i) Air temperature sensor failure/fault.
ii) Not economizing when the unit should be economizing.
iii) Economizing when the unit should not be economizing.
iv) Damper not modulating.
v) Excess outdoor air.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Examine areas and conditions for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions
affecting performance.
B. Examine roughing-in of steam, hydronic, and condensate drainage piping systems and electrical services to
verify actual locations of connections before installation.
C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.02 INSTALLATION
A. Concrete Bases: install floor mounting units on 4” high concrete bases.
B. Install modular indoor air-handling units with the following vibration-control devices.
1. Units with Internally Isolated Fans: secure units to anchor bolts installed in concrete bases.
2. Floor-Mounted Units: support on concrete bases using neoprene pads. Secure units to anchor bolts
installed in concrete bases.
3. Suspended Units: suspend units from structural-steel support frame using threaded steel rods and spring
hangers.
C. Arrange installation of units to provide access space around modular indoor air-handling units for service and
maintenance.
3.03 CONNECTIONS
C. Connect piping to modular indoor air-handling units mounted on vibration isolators with flexible connectors.
D. Connect condensate drain pans using NPS 1-1/4, Type M copper tubing. Extend to nearest equipment or floor
drain. Construct deep trap at connection to drain pan and install cleanouts at changes in direction.
E. Hot- and Chilled-Water Piping: comply with applicable requirements in Specification Section 23 11 13
Hydronic Piping. Connect to supply and return coil tappings with shutoff or balancing valve and union or flange
at each connection.
F. Steam and Condensate Piping: comply with applicable requirements in Specification Section 23 22 13 Steam
and Condensate Piping. Connect to supply and return coil tappings with shutoff valve and union or flange at
each connection.
G. Refrigerant Piping: comply with applicable requirements in Specification Section 23 23 00 Refrigerant Piping.
Connect to supply and return coil tappings with shutoff valve and union or flange at each connection.
H. Duct installation and connection requirements are specified in Specification Section 15900 Ductwork and
Accessories. Drawings indicate general arrangement of ducts and duct accessories. Make final duct
connections with flexible connections.

I. Electrical: Comply with applicable requirements in Division 26 Sections for power wiring, switches, and motor
controls.
A. Manufacturer's Field Service: engage a factory-authorized service representative to inspect field-assembled
components and equipment installation, including piping and electrical connections. Report results in writing.
1. Leak Test: after installation, fill water and steam coils with water and test coils and connections for leaks.
Repair leaks and retest until no leaks exist.
2. Charge refrigerant coils with refrigerant and test for leaks. repair leaks and retest until no leaks exist.
3. Fan Operational Test: after electrical circuitry has been energized, start units to confirm proper motor
rotation and unit operation. Remove malfunctioning units, replace with new units, and retest.
4. Test and adjust controls and safeties. replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and equipment.
B. Final Checks before Startup: perform the following:
1. Verify that shipping, blocking, and bracing are removed.
2. Verify that unit is secure on mountings and supporting devices and that connections to piping, ducts, and
electrical systems are complete. Verify that proper thermal-overload protection is installed in motors,
starters, and disconnect switches.
3. Perform cleaning and adjusting specified in this Section.
4. Disconnect fan drive from motor, verify proper motor rotation direction, and verify free fan wheel rotation
and smooth bearing operations. Reconnect fan drive system, align belts, and install belt guards.
5. Lubricate bearings, pulleys, belts, and other moving parts with factory-recommended lubricants.
6. Set zone dampers to fully open position for each zone.
7. Set face-and-bypass dampers to full face flow.
8. Set outside- and return-air mixing dampers to minimum outside-air setting.
9. Comb coil fins for parallel orientation.
10. Install clean filters.
11. Verify that manual and automatic volume control and fire and smoke dampers in connected duct systems
are in fully open position.
C. Starting procedures for modular indoor air-handling units include the following:
1. Energize motor; verify proper operation of motor, drive system, and fan wheel. Adjust fan to indicated
rpm.
2. Measure and record motor electrical values for voltage and amperage.
3. Manually operate dampers from fully closed to fully open position and record fan performance.
D. Refer to Specification Section 23 05 93 Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing for additional requirements.
3.06 ADJUSTING
A. Adjust damper linkages for proper damper operation.
3.07 CLEANING
A. Clean modular indoor air-handling units internally, on completion of installation, according to manufacturer's
written instructions. Clean fan interiors to remove foreign material and construction dirt and dust. Vacuum
clean fan wheels, cabinets, and coils entering air face.
B. After completing system installation and testing, adjusting, and balancing modular indoor air-handling and air-
distribution systems, clean filter housings and install new filters.


SECTION 23 74 13
PACKAGED OUTDOOR ROOFTOP UNTIS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Include manufacturer's technical data for each model indicated, including rated capacities,
dimensions, required clearances, characteristics, furnished specialties, and accessories.
1. Comply with NFPA 54 for gas-fired furnace section.
2. Gas units AGA-approved specifically for outdoor installation.
3. RTU manufacturer-specific (e.g., Carrier) gas trains and controls are not acceptable.
4. ARI Compliance for Units with Capacities Less Than 135,000 Btuh: Rate rooftop air-conditioner capacity
according to ARI 210/240, "Unitary Air-Conditioning and Air-Source Heat Pump Equipment."
a) Sound Power Level Ratings: comply with ARI 270, "Sound Rating of Outdoor Unitary Equipment."
5. ARI Compliance for Units with Capacities 135,000 Btuh and More: Rate rooftop air-conditioner capacity
according to ARI 340/360, "Commercial and Industrial Unitary Air-Conditioning and Heat Pump
Equipment."
a) Sound Power Level Ratings: Comply with ARI 270, "Sound Rating of Outdoor Unitary Equipment."
6. Units UL-listed and carry UL label.
7. International Energy Conservation Code 2015 compliance.
C. Shop Drawings: Detail equipment assemblies and indicate dimensions, weights, loads, required clearances,
method of field assembly, components, and location and size of each field connection.
1. Design Calculations: Calculate requirements for selecting vibration isolators and for designing vibration
isolation bases.
2. Detail mounting, securing, and flashing of roof curb to roof structure. Indicate coordinating requirements
with roof membrane system.
3. Wiring Diagrams: Power, signal, and control wiring.Provide complete selection showing:
a) Catalogued capacity rating of packaged unit for standard conditions.
b) Correction factors that have been applied to sensible heat capacity for actual entering dry-bulb
temperature conditions.
c) Actual leaving dry-bulb temperature.
d) Indoor fan motor heat has been included.
e) De-ration of total unit capacity for 5,400 feet altitude using 105F temperature for air entering
condenser.
D. Project Record Documents:
1. Shop Drawings:
E. Wiring and termination drawings (Operation and Maintenance Data): For rooftop air conditioners to include in
emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals.
F. Warranties: Special warranties specified in this Section.
1.02 COORDINATION
Denver Public Schools – Facility Management 23 74 13 Packaged Outdoor Rooftop Units

A. Coordinate installation of roof curbs, equipment supports, and roof penetrations. These items are specified in
Division 7 Section Roof Accessories.
1. Fan Belts: One set for each belt-drive fan.
2. Filters: One set of filters for each unit.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 SINGLE ZONE PACKAGED ROOFTOP HVAC UNITS 6 TONS AND SMALLER
1. Aaon
2. Carrier
3. McQuay
4. Trane
5. York
6. Engineered Air
B. Description: Factory assembled and tested; designed for exterior installation; consisting of compressor, indoor
and outside refrigerant coils, indoor fan and outside coil fan, refrigeration and temperature controls, filters, and
dampers.
C. Casing: Galvanized-steel construction with enamel paint finish, removable panels or access doors with neoprene
gaskets for inspection and access to internal parts, minimum 2” thick double wall foam injected insulation,
knockouts for electrical and piping connections, exterior condensate drain connection, and lifting lugs.
D. Indoor Fan: Forward curved, centrifugal, belt driven by single-speed motor.
E. Outside Coil Fan: Propeller type, directly driven by motor.
F. Refrigerant Coils: Aluminum-plate fin and seamless copper tube in steel casing with equalizing-type vertical
distributor.
G. Compressor: Hermetic reciprocating compressor with integral vibration isolators, internal overcurrent and
overtemperature protection, internal pressure relief , and crankcase heater.
H. Refrigeration System:
1. Compressor.
2. Outside coil and fan.
3. Indoor coil and fan.
4. Four-way reversing valve and suction line accumulator.
5. Expansion valve with replaceable thermostatic element.
6. Refrigerant dryer.
7. High-pressure switch.
8. Low-pressure switch.
9. Thermostat for coil freeze-up protection during low-ambient temperature operation or loss of air.
10. Low-ambient switch.
11. Brass service valves installed in discharge and liquid lines.
12. Charge of refrigerant.
I. Filters: In accordance with Division 21-25.

J. Heat Exchanger: Stainless-steel construction for natural-gas-fired burners with the following controls:
1. Redundant single or dual gas valve with manual shutoff.
2. Direct-spark pilot ignition.
3. Electronic flame sensor.
4. Induced-draft blower.
5. Flame rollout switch.
K. Outside-Air Damper: Linked damper blades, for 0 to 25 percent outside air, with fully modulating, spring-return
damper motor and hood.
L. Economizer: Return- and outside-air dampers with neoprene seals, outside-air filter, and hood.
1. Damper Motor: Fully modulating spring return with adjustable minimum position.
2. Damper Performance: Air leakage rate not greater than 4 cfm/ft2 of damper surface area at 1.0 inch water
gauge and labled by an approved agency when tested in accordance with AMCA 500D for such purpose.
3. Control: Electronic-control system uses mixed-air temperature and selects between outside-air and return-
air enthalpy to adjust mixing dampers.
4. Relief Damper: Gravity actuated with bird screen and hood.
M. Power Connection: Provide for single connection of power to unit with unit-mounted disconnect switch
accessible from outside unit and control-circuit transformer with built-in circuit breaker.
N. Unit Controls: Solid-state control board and components contain at least the following features:
1. Indoor fan on/off delay.
2. Default control to ensure proper operation after power interruption.
3. Service relay output.
4. Unit diagnostics and diagnostic code storage.
5. Field-adjustable control parameters.
6. Dehumidification control with dehumidistat.
7. Economizer control.
8. Gas valve delay between first- and second-stage firing.
9. Indoor-air quality control with carbon dioxide sensor.
10. Low-ambient control, allowing operation down to -30oF.
11. Minimum run time.
12. Night setback mode.
13. Return-air temperature limit.
14. Smoke alarm with smoke detector installed in supply and return air as required.
15. Low-refrigerant pressure control.
16. Digital display of outside temperature, supply-air temperature, return-air temperature, economizer damper
position, indoor-air quality, and control parameters.
17. Economizer Fault Detection and Diagnostics (FDD).
i) Outside air.
ii) Supply air.
iii) Return air.

O. DDC Temperature Control: Install stand-alone controls compatible with controls specified in section 25 90 00
providing link between unit controls and DDC temperature-control systems in section 25 90 00 and Section 25
50 00 – Intelligent Building Automation System (IBAS).
P. Thermostat: Programmable, electronic; with heating setback and cooling setup with seven-day programming;
and the following:
1. Touch sensitive keyboard.
2. Automatic switching.
3. Deg F readout.
4. LED indicators.
5. Hour/day programming.
6. Manual override capability.
7. Time and operational mode readout.
8. Status indicator.
9. Battery backup.
10. Subbase with manual system switch (on-heat-auto-cool) and fan switch (auto-on).
11. Fan-proving switch to lock out unit if fan fails.
12. Dirty-filter switch.
Q. Optional Accessories:
1. Cold-Weather Kit: Electric heater maintains temperature in gas burner compartment.
2. Service Outlets: Two, 115-V, ground-fault, circuit-interrupter type.
3. Condensate drain trap.
5. Hail guards of steel, painted to match casing.

6. Power exhaust fan.
7. Demand control ventilation.
R. Roof Curb: Steel with corrosion-protection coating, gasketing, and factory-installed wood nailer; complying
with NRCA standards; minimum height of 14 inches.
2.02 ROOFTOP AIR CONDITIONERS 7-1/2 TO 20 TONS
1. AAON, Inc.
2. Carrier Corp.
3. Engineered Air
4. Mammoth Inc.
5. McQuay International
6. Trane Company (The); North American Commercial Group
7. YORK International Corporation
dampers.
C. Casing: Galvanized-steel, double wall construction with enamel paint finish, hinged panels or access doors with
neoprene gaskets for inspection and access to internal parts, minimum 2-inch-thick foam-injected insulation,
knockouts for electrical and piping connections, exterior condensate drain connection, and lifting lugs.
D. Indoor Fan: Forward curved, centrifugal, belt driven with adjustable motor sheaves, grease-lubricated ball
bearings, and motor.
E. Outside Coil Fan: Propeller type, directly driven by permanently lubricated motor.
F. Refrigerant Coils: Aluminum-plate fin and seamless copper tube in steel casing with equalizing-type vertical
distributor.[ Provide phenolic epoxy corrosion-protection coating to both coils.]
G. Compressor(s): Hermetic reciprocating compressors with integral vibration isolators, internal overcurrent and
overtemperature protection, internal pressure relief , and crankcase heater(s).
H. Refrigeration System:
1. Compressor(s)
2. Outside coil and fan
3. Indoor coil and fan
4. Four-way reversing valve and suction line accumulator
5. Check valves
6. Expansion valves with replaceable thermostatic elements
7. Refrigerant dryers
8. High-pressure switches
9. Low-pressure switches
10. Thermostats for coil freeze-up protection during low-ambient temperature operation or loss of air
11. Independent refrigerant circuits
12. Brass service valves installed in discharge and liquid lines
13. Charge of refrigerant
14. Hot-Gas Bypass: Factory-installed valve (no greater than 50% of total capacity)
15. Timed Off Control: Automatic-reset control shuts compressor off after five minutes

I. Filters: In accordance with Section 23 40 00 HVAC Air Cleaning Devices.
J. Heat Exchanger: Stainless-steel construction for natural-gas-fired burners with the following controls:
1. Redundant dual gas valve with manual shutoff.
K. Outside-Air Damper: Linked damper blades, for 0 to 25 percent outside air, with fully modulating, spring-return
L. Economizer: Return- and outside-air dampers with neoprene seals, outside-air filter, and hood.
1. Damper Motor: Fully modulating spring return with adjustable minimum position.
3. Control: electronic-control system uses mixed-air temperature and selects between outside-air and return-
air enthalpy to adjust mixing dampers.
M. Power Connection: Provide for single connection of power to unit with unit-mounted disconnect switch
N. Unit Controls: Solid-state control board and components contain at least the following features:
6. Economizer control.
7. Electric heat staging.
9. Indoor-air quality control with carbon dioxide sensor.
10. Low-ambient control, allowing operation down to 0oF.
14. Smoke alarm with smoke detector installed in supply and return air as required.
position, indoor-air quality, and control parameters.
17. Variable-Air-Volume Control: variable-frequency drive controls supply-air static pressure. Supply-air,
static-pressure limit shuts unit down on high pressure.
18. Economizer Fault Detection and Diagnostics (FDD):
i) Outside air.

ii) Supply air.
iii) Return air.
O. DDC Temperature Control: Install stand-alone controls compatible with controls specified in section 15950
providing link between unit controls and DDC temperature-control systems in section 15950 and Section 15975
Integrated Building Automation System (IBAS).
P. Thermostat: Programmable, electronic; with heating setback and cooling setup with seven-day programming;
and the following:
1. Touch sensitive keyboard.
2. Automatic switching.
3. Deg F readout.
4. LED indicators.
5. Hour/day programming.
6. Manual override capability.
7. Time and operational mode readout.
8. Status indicator.
9. Battery backup.
10. Subbase with manual system switch (on-heat-auto-cool) and fan switch (auto-on).
11. Fan-proving switch to lock out unit if fan fails.
1. Cold-Weather Kit: Electric heater maintains temperature in gas burner compartment.
2. Service Outlets: Two, 115-V, ground-fault, circuit-interrupter type.

3. PVC condensate drain trap.
5. Hail guards of steel, painted to match casing.
6. Power exhaust fan centrifugal type.
7. Vertical vent extension.
8. Demand control ventilation.
2.03 ROOFTOP AIR CONDITIONERS LARGER THAN 20 TONS
1. AAON, Inc.
2. Carrier Corp.
3. Engineered Air
4. Mammoth Inc.
7. YORK International Corporation
dampers.
C. Casing: Manufacturer's standard double-wall galvanized sheet metal construction with exterior enamel paint
finish, hinged access doors with neoprene gaskets for inspection and access to internal parts, minimum 2” thick
foam-injected thermal insulation, knockouts for electrical and piping connections, exterior condensate drain
connection, and lifting lugs.
D. Indoor Fan: Forward curved or Airfoil, centrifugal, belt driven with adjustable motor sheaves, grease-lubricated
ball bearings, and motor Mount fan and motor assembly on base with spring isolators having 2-inch deflection.
E. Return-Air Fan: Forward curved or Airfoil, centrifugal, belt driven with adjustable motor sheaves, grease-
lubricated ball bearings, and motor Mount fan and motor assembly on base with spring isolators having 2-inch
deflection.
F. Outside Coil Fan: Propeller type, directly driven by permanently lubricated motor.
G. Refrigerant Coils: Aluminum-plate fin and seamless copper tube in galvanized-steel casing with equalizing-type
vertical distributor and thermal expansion valve; tested to 450 psig and leak tested to 300 psig with air under
water. Insulate coil section. Provide phenolic epoxy corrosion-protection coating to both coils. Provide
stainless-steel drain pan under indoor coil.
H. Compressor(s): Semihermetic reciprocating compressors with integral vibration isolators, internal overcurrent
and overtemperature protection, internal pressure relief, and crankcase heater(s).
I. Refrigeration System:
1. Compressor(s)
2. Outside coil and fan
3. Indoor coil and fan
4. Four-way reversing valve and suction line accumulator
5. Check valves
6. Expansion valves with replaceable thermostatic elements
7. Refrigerant dryers

8. High-pressure switches
9. Low-pressure switches
10. Thermostats for coil freeze-up protection during low-ambient temperature operation or loss of air
11. Independent refrigerant circuits
12. Brass service valves installed in discharge and liquid lines
13. Charge of refrigerant
14. Timed Off Control: Automatic-reset control shuts compressor off after five minutes
15. Refrigerant Circuits: Interlaced refrigerant-coil circuiting with circuit for each compressor
16. Capacity Control: Cylinder unloaders with steps as scheduled
17. Capacity Control: Hot-gas bypass valve and piping on one compressor (not greater than 25% of total
capacity)
18. Compressor Motor Overload Protection: Manual reset
19. Antirecycling Timing Device: Prevents compressor restart for five minutes after shutdown
20. Adjustable, Low-Ambient, Head-Pressure Control: designed to operate at temperatures as low as 0 deg F
by cycling outside coil fans and controlling speed of last fan of each circuit
21. Oil-Pressure Switch: Designed to shut down compressors on low oil pressure
J. Filters: In accordance with Section 23 40 00 HVAC Air Cleraning Devices.
K. Heat Exchanger: Stainless-steel construction for natural-gas-fired burners with the following controls:
1. Redundant dual gas valve with manual shutoff.
2. Limited modulating gas valve with turn-down ratio of at least 3:1.
L. Water Heating Coils: Aluminum-plate fin and seamless copper tube in galvanized-steel casing, tested to 300
psig and leak tested to 200 psig with air under water; with modulating control valve and actuator. Insulate coil
section.
M. Outside-Air Damper: Linked damper blades, for 0 to 25 percent outside air, with fully modulating, spring-return
N. Economizer: Return- and outside-air dampers with neoprene seals, outside-air filter, and hood.
O. Power Connection: Provide for single connection of power to unit with unit-mounted disconnect switch
P. Unit Controls: Solid-state control board and components contain at least the following features:
6. Defrost control.

7. Economizer controlElectric heat staging.
9. Low-ambient control, allowing operation down to 0oF.
13. Smoke alarm with smoke detector installed in supply and return air.
position, indoor-air quality, and control parameters
16. Variable-Air-Volume Control: Variable-frequency drive controls supply-air static pressure. Supply-air,
static-pressure limit shuts unit down on high pressure
17. DDC Temperature Control Provided and installed by section 25 00 00 Integrated Automation (Refer to
Section 25 50 00 Integrated Building Automation System (IBAS)) for interface requirements.
18. Economizer Fault Detection and Diagnostics (FDD)
i) Outside air.
ii) Supply air.
iii) Return air.
1. Cold-Weather Kit: Electric heater maintains temperature in gas burner compartment
2. Service Outlets: Two, 115-V, ground-fault, circuit-interrupter type

3. PVC condensate drain trap
4. Dirty-filter switch
5. Hail guards of steel, painted to match casing
6. Power exhaust fan, forward curved, centrifugal, belt driven with adjustable sheaves
7. Vertical vent extension
8. Demand control ventilation
2.04 MOTORS
A. General requirements for motors are specified in Division 23.
B. Motor Sizes: Minimum size as indicated; if not indicated, large enough so driven load will not require motor to
operate in service factor range above 1.0.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION
A. Install units level and plumb, maintaining manufacturer's recommended clearances
B. Unit Support: Install unit level on structural curbs. Coordinate wall penetrations and flashing with wall
construction.
3.02 CONNECTIONS
A. Piping installation requirements are specified in other Division 21-25 Sections. Drawings indicate general
C. Gas Piping: Comply with applicable requirements in Specification Section 23 11 23 Natural Gas Systems.
Connect gas piping to burner, full size of gas train inlet, and connect with union and shutoff valve with sufficient
clearance for burner removal and service.
1. Gas lines and electrical conduit over 2” shall be fastened to Unistrut stands. Stands shall be mechanically
fastened to 2’x2’x2” concrete paver. Pavers shall be set on modified rolled roofing pads. One stand for
every ten foot (10’) of gas line and no more than one paver per stand.
2. Hot-Water Heating Piping: comply with applicable requirements Specification Section 23 11 13 Hydronic
Piping. Connect to supply and return coil tappings with shutoff or balancing valve and union or flange at
each connection.
D. Duct installation requirements are specified in Specificaiotn Section 23 31 00 HVAC Duct and Casing.
Drawings indicate the general arrangement of ducts. The following are specific connection requirements:
1. Install ducts to termination in roof curb.
2. Remove roof decking only as required for passage of ducts. Do not cut out decking under entire roof curb.
3. Terminate return-air duct through roof structure and insulate space between roof and bottom of unit with 2”
thick, acoustic duct liner.
E. Electrical System Connections: Comply with applicable requirements in Division 26 Sections for power wiring,
switches, and motor controls.
F. Rooftop conduits shall be fastened to sheet metal triangle stands. Stands shall be mechanically fastened to
2’x2’x2” concrete pavers. Pavers shall be set on modified rolled roofing pads. One stand for every ten foot (10’)
of conduit and no more than one paver per stand. Supports shall not penetrate the roof membrane.
A. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to inspect test, and adjust
field-assembled components and equipment installation, including connections, and to assist in field testing.
Report results in writing and deliver to DPS.

B. Perform the following field quality-control tests and inspections and prepare test reports:
1. After installing rooftop air conditioners and after electrical circuitry has been energized, test units for
compliance with requirements.
2. Inspect for and remove shipping bolts, blocks, and tie-down straps.
and unit operation.
C. Remove malfunctioning units, replace with new units, and retest as specified above.
3.04 ADJUSTING
A. Adjust initial temperature set points.
B. Set field-adjustable switches and circuit-breaker trip ranges as indicated.
C. Occupancy Adjustments: When requested within 12 months of date of Substantial Completion, provide on-site

SECTION 23 81 23
COMPUTER-ROOM AIR-CONDITIONING
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data:
1. Computer room air conditioning units.
2. Air-cooled condenser package.
3. Water-cooled condenser package.
4. Glycol-cooled condenser package.
5. Glycol pump package.
6. Glycol dry cooler.
7. Glycol-free cooling system.
8. Control package.
9. Recessed ceiling units.
B. Shop Drawings:
A. Provide Factory-assembled, package-type computer room air conditioning units; product of manufacturer
regularly engaged in production of size and type of unit specified and issuing complete catalog data on such
products.
B. Manufacturer shall be responsible for selection and operation of components furnished. Provide written
certification that related components not furnished by the manufacturer have been selected in accordance with
manufacturer's requirements.
A. Store equipment in dry location.
B. Retain protective covers of connections and protective coatings during storage.
C. Protect bearings and couplings against damage from sand, grit, and other foreign matter.
D. Comply with equipment manufacturer's written rigging instructions.
1.04 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate size and location of concrete bases.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 FLOOR-MOUNTING UNITS 5 TONS (18 kW) AND SMALLER
1. Carrier Corp.
2. Compu-Aire, Inc.
3. Data Aire Inc.
4. Liebert Corporation
Denver Public Schools – Facility Management 23 81 23 Computer-Room Air-Conditioning

6. Stulz Investment Corp. of America
B. Description: Self-contained, factory assembled, prewired, and prepiped; consisting of cabinet, fan, filters, and
controls; for vertical floor mounting in upflow or downflow configuration.
C. Control System:
1. Unit-mounted panel with main fan contactor, compressor contactor, compressor start capacitor, control
transformer with circuit breaker, solid-state temperature-and humidity-control modules, humidity contactor,
time-delay relay, reheat contactor, and high-temperature thermostat. Provide solid-state, wall-mounting
control panel with start-stop switch, adjustable humidity set point, and adjustable temperature set point.
Provide auxiliary contacts for trouble alarm signal to the DDC system.
3. Connect to Integrated Building Automation System. Refer to Section 25 50 00 – Intelligent Building
2.02 CEILING-MOUNTING UNITS
1. Carrier Corp.
2. Compu-Aire, Inc.
3. Data Aire Inc.
4. Liebert Corporation
6. Stulz Investment Corp. of America
B. Description: Self-contained, factory assembled, prewired, and prepiped; consisting of cabinet, fan, filters, and
controls; for horizontal ceiling mounting to fit 24-by-48-inch T-bar ceiling opening.
C. Cabinet: Galvanized steel with baked-enamel finish, insulated with 1/2-inch-thick duct liner.
D. Evaporator Fan: Forward curved, centrifugal, and directly driven by two-speed motor.
1. Motor characteristics such as NEMA designation, temperature rating, service factor, enclosure type, and
efficiency are specified in Division 23 Section "Motors." If different characteristics are required, add
paragraphs below to suit Project.
E. Motors: Provide UL listed, high effciency motors with quiet noise rating.
F. Compressor: Hermetic, with resilient suspension system, oil strainer, and internal motor overload protection.
1. Refrigeration Circuit: Low-pressure switch, manual-reset high-pressure switch, thermal-expansion valve
with external equalizer, sight glass with moisture indicator, service shutoff valves, charging valves, and
charge of refrigerant.
G. Evaporator Coil: Direct-expansion cooling coil of seamless copper tubes expanded into aluminum fins. Mount
coil assembly over stainless-steel drain pan having a condensate pump unit with integral float switch, pump-
motor assembly, and condensate reservoir.
H. Water-Cooled Condenser(where applicable): Brazed-plate type with liquid-line stop valve and head-pressure-
actuated, water-regulating valve.
I. Air-Cooled Condenser(where applciable): Integral copper-tube aluminum-fin coil with propeller or centrifugal
fan, direct driven.
1. Split system shall have suction- and liquid-line compatible fittings and refrigerant piping for field
interconnection.

J. Chilled-Water Coil: Seamless copper tubes expanded into aluminum fins with modulating control valve. Mount
coil assembly over stainless-steel drain pan having a condensate pump unit with integral float switch, pump-
motor assembly, and condensate reservoir.
K. Electric-Resistance Heating Coil: Finned-tube electric elements with contactor, dehumidification relay, and
high-temperature-limit switch.
L. Filter: 1-inch-thick, disposable, glass-fiber media.
M. Atomizing Humidifier: Centrifugal atomizer with stainless-steel pan, demister pad, and solenoid valve.
N. Electrode Steam Humidifier: Self-contained, microprocessor-controlled unit with disposable, polypropylene-
plastic cylinders and having field-adjustable steel electrodes and stainless-steel steam dispersion tube.
1. Plumbing Components and Valve Bodies: Plastic, linked by flexible rubber hosing, with water fill with air
gap and solenoid valve incorporating built-in strainer, pressure-reducing and flow-regulating orifice, and
drain with integral air gap on drain.
2. Control: Fully modulating to provide gradual 0 to 100 percent capacity with field-adjustable maximum
capacity; with high-water probe.
3. Drain Cycle: Field-adjustable drain duration and drain interval.
O. Use only 1” pipe with 45s for condensate drains.
2.03 CONTROL SYSTEM
A. Unit-mounted panel with main fan contactor, compressor contactor, compressor start capacitor, control
transformer with circuit breaker, solid-state temperature-and humidity-control modules, humidity contactor,
time-delay relay, reheat contactor, and high-temperature thermostat. Provide solid-state, wall-mounting control
panel with start-stop switch, adjustable humidity set point, and adjustable temperature set point. Provide
auxiliary contacts for trouble alarm signal to the DDC system.
B. Factory-wired control panel in accordance with NEC.
C. Connect to Intelligent Building Automation System. Refer to Section 23 50 00- Intelligent Building Automation
System (IBAS) for interface requirements.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 CONNECTIONS
A. Piping installation requirements are specified in other Division 23 Sections.
C. Water and Drainage Connections: Comply with applicable requirements in Division 23 Section "Domestic
Water Piping." Provide adequate connections for water-cooled units, condensate drain, and humidifier flushing
system.
D. Hot-Water Heating Piping: Comply with applicable requirements in Specification Section 23 21 13 Hydronic
Piping. Provide shutoff valves in inlet and outlet piping to reheat coils.
E. Condenser-Water Piping: Comply with applicable requirements in Specification Section 23 21 13 Hydronic
Piping. Provide shutoff valves in water inlet and outlet piping on water-cooled units.
F. Refrigerant Piping: Comply with applicable requirements in Specification Section 23 23 00 Refrigerant Piping
Provide shutoff valves and piping.
G. Electrical System Connections: Comply with applicable requirements in Division 26 Sections for power wiring,
switches, and motor controls.
A. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to inspect, test, and adjust
field-assembled components and equipment installation, including connections, and to assist in field testing.
Report results in writing.
B. Perform the following field tests and inspections and prepare test reports:
1. Inspect for and remove shipping bolts, blocks, and tie-down straps.

2. After installing computer-room air-conditioning units and after electrical circuitry has been energized, test
for compliance with requirements.
and unit operation.
B. Verify that computer-room air-conditioning units are installed and connected according to manufacturer's
written instructions and the Contract Documents.
C. Verify that electrical wiring installation complies with manufacturer's submittal and installation requirements in
Division 26 Sections.
D. Complete installation and startup checks according to manufacturer's written instructions.
E. After startup service and performance test, change filters and flush humidifier.
3.04 ADJUSTING
A. Adjust initial temperature and humidity set points.
B. Set field-adjustable switches and circuit-breaker trip ranges as indicated.
C. Occupancy Adjustments: when requested within 12 months of date of Substantial Completion, provide on-site

SECTION 23 82 16
AIR COILS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data:
1. Coil material and contruction data.
2. Certified dimensions..
B. Quality Assurance Data: {the following are suggestions; include what is necessary}
1. All coils shall be certified by the manufacturer to comply with all requirements of ARI Standard 410.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MANUFACTURERS
A. Aerofin
B. Airtherm
C. Carrier
D. Dunham-Bush
E. Heatcraft
F. McQuay
G. Pace
H. Temtrol
I. Trane
J. Wing
K. York
2.02 HYDRONIC COILS
A. Description: Self-draining coil fabricated to ARI 410.
B. Piping Connections: Threaded, on same end.
C. Tubes: Copper, complying with ASTM B 75.
1. Tube Diameter: 0.625 inch minimum.
2. Minimum Tube Thickness: 0.020 inch,
D. Fins: Aluminum with fin spacing as required.
E. Fin and Tube Joint: Mechanical bond.
F. Headers: Seamless copper tube with brazed joints, prime coated.
G. Frames: Galvanized-steel channel frame, 0.052 inch.
H. Ratings: Design tested and rated according to ASHRAE 33 and ARI 410.
1. Working Pressure Ratings: 200 psig, 325 deg F.
2.03 STEAM COILS
A. Description: Distribution header coil fabricated to ARI 410, with threaded steam supply and condensate
connections.
1. Connections: Steam supply on both ends; condensate on one end.
Denver Public Schools – Facility Management 23 82 16 Air Coils

B. Tubes: Copper, complying with ASTM B 75.
1. Tube Diameter: 0.625 inch minimum
C. Fins: Aluminum with fin spacing as required.
D. Fin and Tube Joint: Mechanical bond.
E. Headers: Seamless copper tube with brazed joints, prime coated
F. Frames: Galvanized-steel channel frame, 0.052 inch.
G. Ratings: Design tested and rated according to ASHRAE 33 and ARI 410.
1. Working Pressure Ratings: 100 psig.
2.04 REFRIGERANT COILS
A. Description: Coil designed for use with CFC free refrigerant or R-22 refrigerant, fabricated to ARI 410,
connected with soldered or brazed fittings.
B. Capacity Reduction: Circuit for interleaved control or hot gas by-pass as needed.
C. Tubes: Copper, complying with ASTM B 75.
1. Tube Diameter: 0.625 inch.
D. Fins: Aluminum with fin spacing as required.
E. Fin and Tube Joint: Mechanical bond.
F. Suction and Distributor: Seamless copper tube with brazed joints.
G. Frames: Galvanized-steel channel frame, 0.052 inch.
H. Ratings: Design tested and rated according to ASHRAE 33 and ARI 410.
1. Working Pressure Rating: 300 psig.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION
A. Install coils level and plumb.
B. Install coils in metal ducts and casings constructed according to SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction
Standards, Metal and Flexible."
C. Install stainless-steel drain pan under each chilled-water coil.
1. Construct drain pans to comply with ASHRAE 62.
2. Construct drain pans to extend beyond coil length and width and to connect to condensate trap and
drainage.
3. Extend drain pan 5 inches upstream from coil face.
3.02 CONNECTIONS
A. Coordinate piping installations and specialty arrangements with schematics on Drawings and with requirements
specified in hydronic, steam and condensate, and refrigerant piping systems.
B. Piping installation requirements are specified in other Division 25 Sections. Drawings indicate general
C. Install piping adjacent to coils to allow service and maintenance.
D. Unless otherwise indicated, connect piping with unions and shutoff valves to allow coils to be disconnected
without draining piping. Refer to piping system Sections for specific valve and specialty arrangements.
Denver Public Schools – Facility Management 23 82 16 Air Coils

SECTION 23 82 33
CONVECTORS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 REFERENCES
A. Institute of Boiler and Radiator Manufacturers (IBR), superseded by Hydronics Institute.
B. Hydronics Institute (HYDI).
1.02 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data:
1. Baseboard or finned-tube radiation.
2. Convectors.
3. Hydronic radiant ceiling panels.
B. Shop Drawings:
1. Product Data: Include certified performance and rated capacities; shipping, installed, and operating weights;
furnished specialties; and accessories for each type of product indicated.
2. Required clearances.
3. Location and size of each field connection.
4. Enclosure joints, corner pieces, access doors, and other accessories.
5. Method of attaching hangers to building structure.
A. Radiation capacities shall be in accordance with HYDI Standard for "Testing and Rating Code for Finned-Tube
Commercial Radiation.”
B. Product Options: Drawings indicate size, profiles, connections, and dimensional requirements of pumps and are
based on the specific types and models indicated. Other manufacturers' pumps with equal performance
C. Regulatory Requirements: Fabricate and test steam condensate pumps to comply with HI 1.1-1.5, "Centrifugal
B. Store Heating Terminals in dry location.
E. Comply with manufacturer’s operations and maintenance instructions during construction.
1.05 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate size and location connections to the heating water or steam system. Locate connections in an
accessible location.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 FINNED-TUBE RADIATION
Denver Public Schools – Facility Management 23 82 33 Convectors

A. Manufacturer:
1. Dunham-Busch.
2. Sterling.
3. Trane.
4. Vulcan.
B. Heating Element:
1. Copper tubes with aluminum fins.
C. Enclosures:
1. Fabricated from 14-gauge steel.
2. Manual control dampers with knob actuators.
3. Enclosure to be readily removable between each mullion bracket and support enclosure for access to
manual valves, balance cocks and air vents.
4. Enclosures shall be furnished without access panels. Provide hinged access panels separately, to be
installed after piping and radiation covers are in place, to all manual valves, control valves, balance cocks,
and air vents.
5. Enclosures shall have sloped top with manual damper or flat top with front outlet and manual damper.
2.02 CONVECTORS
A. Manufacturers:
1. Airtherm.
2. American Air Filter.
3. Dunham-Bush.
4. Sterling.
5. Trane.
6. Vulcan.
B. Heating Element:
C. Enclosure:
1. Minimum 14-gauge steel fronts and tops, 18-gauge on backs.
2. Manual control damper with knob actuator.
3. Non-recessed types shall have sloping tops.
4. End caps where butted to wall, and on exposed ends.
2.03 HYDRONIC RADIANT CEILING PANELS (Not recommended)
A. Manufacturer:
1. Airtex.
2. Shelley.
B. Performance:
1. Panel performance and water pressure drops shall be certified by an independent certified testing
laboratory.
C. Finishes:
1. All panels shall be non-perforated with silk-screened off-white paint to match lay-in acoustical ceiling tiles
per Architectural Specification.

PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION
A. Install cabinet unit heaters to comply with NFPA 90A.
B. Suspend cabinet unit heaters from structure with rubber-in-shear vibration isolators (rubber hangers). Vibration
isolators are specified in Specification Section 23 05 48 Mechanical Sound and Vibration.
C. Install wall-mounting thermostats and switch controls in electrical outlet boxes at heights to match lighting
controls.
D. Unless otherwise indicated, install shutoff valve and union or flange at each connection.
E. Install piping adjacent to machine to allow service and maintenance.

SECTION 23 82 39
UNIT HEATERS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 REFERENCES
A. Hydronics Institute (HYDI).
1.02 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data:
1. Cabinet unit heaters.
2. Hot water unit heaters.
B. Shop Drawings:
A. Product Options: drawings indicate size, profiles, connections, and dimensional requirements of pumps and are
B. Regulatory Requirements: fabricate and test steam condensate pumps to comply with HI 1.1-1.5, "Centrifugal
1.05 COORDINATION
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 CABINET UNIT HEATERS
A. Manufacturers:
1. Airtherm
2. Carrier
Denver Public Schools – Facility Management 23 82 39 Unit Heaters

3. McQuay
4. Modine
5. Sterling
6. Trane
7. Vulcan
8. York
B. Heating Element:
C. Cabinet:
1. Minimum 14-gauge furniture-grade steel.
2. Non-recessed types shall have sloping tops.
D. Fans:
1. Statically and dynamically balanced to eliminate vibrations.
E. Motors:
1. Three speed. (Select unit at lowest speed.)
F. Filters:
1. One-inch thick, permanent, cleanable-type, located in a frame in the return air stream, easily removable for
service by removing front access panel.
G. Controls:
1. Internal unit-mounted, pre-wired three-speed switch and "off" in addition to automatic temperature controls
as specified in Controls Section.
2.02 HYDRONIC UNIT HEATERS
A. Manufacturers:
1. Airtherm
2. Carrier
3. McQuay
4. Modine
5. Sterling
6. Trane
B. Heating Element:
C. Cabinet:
1. 14-gauge steel.
D. Fans:
1. Horizontal or vertical propeller type.
E. Controls:
1. As specified in Controls Section.
F. Louvers:
1. Movable for lateral and horizontal diffusion.

PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION
controls.

SECTION 23 83 23
UNIT VENTILATORS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 REFERENCES
A. Institute of Boiler and Radiator Manufacturers (IBR), superseded by Hydronics Institute.
B. Hydronics Institute (HYDI).
1.02 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data:
1. Unit ventilators.
B. Shop Drawings:
A. Radiation capacities shall be in accordance with HYDI Standard for "Testing and Rating Code for Finned-Tube
Commercial Radiation.”
C. Regulatory Requirements: fabricate and test steam condensate pumps to comply with HI 1.1-1.5, "Centrifugal
A. Manufacturer's Preparation for Shipping: clean flanges and exposed machined metal surfaces and treat with
1.05 COORDINATION
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 UNIT VENTILATORS
A. Manufacturer
1. Macic Aire
Denver Public Schools – Facility Management 23 83 23 Unit Ventilators

PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION
controls.
Denver Public Schools – Facility Management 23 83 23 Unit Ventilators


Division 23

Caricato da

Informazioni sul documento

Titolo originale

Copyright

Formati disponibili

Condividi questo documento

Condividi o incorpora il documento

Opzioni di condivisione

Hai trovato utile questo documento?

Questo contenuto è inappropriato?

Copyright:

Formati disponibili

Division 23

Caricato da

Copyright:

Formati disponibili

Design & Construction Standards:

HVAC AIR DUCT CLEANING

COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR HVAC

GENERAL DUTY VALVES FOR HVAC

MECHANICAL SOUND AND VIBRATION

Denver Public Schools – Facility Management 23 05 48 Mechanical Sound and Vibration

Denver Public Schools – Facility Management 23 05 48 Mechanical Sound and Vibration

Denver Public Schools – Facility Management 23 05 48 Mechanical Sound and Vibration

Denver Public Schools – Facility Management 23 05 48 Mechanical Sound and Vibration

IDENTIFICATION FOR HVAC

Denver Public Schools – Facility Management 23 05 53 Identification for HVAC

Classification Color of Field District Letters Legend

Denver Public Schools – Facility Management 23 05 53 Identification for HVAC

Denver Public Schools – Facility Management 23 05 53 Identification for HVAC

Denver Public Schools – Facility Management 23 05 53 Identification for HVAC

TESTING, ADJUSTING AND BALANCING

Denver Public Schools – Facility Management 23 05 93 Testing, Adjusting and Balancing

Denver Public Schools – Facility Management 23 05 93 Testing, Adjusting and Balancing

Denver Public Schools – Facility Management 23 05 93 Testing, Adjusting and Balancing

3.04 TAB REPORT

Denver Public Schools – Facility Management 23 05 93 Testing, Adjusting and Balancing

Denver Public Schools – Facility Management 23 07 00 HVAC Insulation

Denver Public Schools – Facility Management 23 07 00 HVAC Insulation

Denver Public Schools – Facility Management 23 07 00 HVAC Insulation

Denver Public Schools – Facility Management 23 07 00 HVAC Insulation

Denver Public Schools – Facility Management 23 07 00 HVAC Insulation

Insulation Jacket Insulation

Denver Public Schools – Facility Management 23 07 00 HVAC Insulation

COMMISSIONING FOR HVAC

Denver Public Schools – Facility Management 23 08 00 Commissioning for HVAC

Denver Public Schools – Facility Management 23 08 00 Commissioning for HVAC

Denver Public Schools – Facility Management 23 08 00 Commissioning for HVAC

Denver Public Schools – Facility Management 23 08 00 Commissioning for HVAC

Denver Public Schools – Facility Management 23 08 00 Commissioning for HVAC

Denver Public Schools – Facility Management 23 08 00 Commissioning for HVAC

Denver Public Schools – Facility Management 23 08 00 Commissioning for HVAC

Denver Public Schools – Facility Management 23 08 00 Commissioning for HVAC

Denver Public Schools – Facility Management 23 08 00 Commissioning for HVAC

Denver Public Schools – Facility Management 23 08 00 Commissioning for HVAC

Denver Public Schools – Facility Management 23 08 00 Commissioning for HVAC

Denver Public Schools – Facility Management 23 08 00 Commissioning for HVAC

Denver Public Schools – Facility Management 23 08 00 Commissioning for HVAC

Denver Public Schools – Facility Management 23 08 00 Commissioning for HVAC

Denver Public Schools – Facility Management 23 08 00 Commissioning for HVAC

Denver Public Schools – Facility Management 23 08 00 Commissioning for HVAC

Denver Public Schools – Facility Management 23 08 00 Commissioning for HVAC

Denver Public Schools – Facility Management 23 08 00 Commissioning for HVAC

Denver Public Schools – Facility Management 23 08 00 Commissioning for HVAC

Denver Public Schools – Facility Management 23 08 00 Commissioning for HVAC

Denver Public Schools – Facility Management 23 08 00 Commissioning for HVAC

NATURAL GAS PIPING

Denver Public Schools – Facility Management 23 11 23 Natural Gas Piping

Denver Public Schools – Facility Management 23 11 23 Natural Gas Piping

Denver Public Schools – Facility Management 23 11 23 Natural Gas Piping

Denver Public Schools – Facility Management 23 11 23 Natural Gas Piping

Denver Public Schools – Facility Management 23 21 13 Hydronic Piping

Denver Public Schools – Facility Management 23 21 13 Hydronic Piping

Denver Public Schools – Facility Management 23 21 13 Hydronic Piping

Denver Public Schools – Facility Management 23 21 13 Hydronic Piping

Denver Public Schools – Facility Management 23 21 13 Hydronic Piping

Denver Public Schools – Facility Management 23 21 13 Hydronic Piping

Denver Public Schools – Facility Management 23 21 13 Hydronic Piping

Denver Public Schools – Facility Management 23 21 13 Hydronic Piping